Carrier 511 69NT40-541. From 300 To 499.

Container Refrigeration
OPERATIONS AND SERVICE

MANUAL
For
69NT40-541-300 to 499
Container Refrigeration Units
T-318 Rev D
OPERATIONS AND SERVICE
MANUAL
For
69NT40-541-300 to 499
© Carrier Corporation, 2021 Printed in U. S. A. April 2021

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH NUMBER PAGE
SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.1 GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 FIRST AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.4 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.5 SPECIFIC WARNING AND CAUTION STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3 FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.1 Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.2 Temperature Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.3 Pressure Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.4 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.5 Condenser Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.6 Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.7 Evaporator Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.8 Plate Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4 OPTION DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.2 Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.3 USDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.4 Interrogator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.5 Remote Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.6 Quest − CCPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.7 Communications Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.8 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.9 Temperature Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.10 Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.11 Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.12 Thermometer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.13 Water Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.14 Back Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.15 460 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.16 230 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.17 Cable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.18 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.19 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.20 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.21 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.22 Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.23 Condenser Grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.24 Emergency Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.4.25 eAutoFresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
i T-318
2.4.26 Arctic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.4.27 Power Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.3 Evaporator Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.4 Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.1.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.1.6 Water-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.1.7 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.1.8 Communications Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.3 ELECTRICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.5 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
MICROPROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1.1 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.1.2 Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.1.3 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3 MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.1 Perishable Mode Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.2 Perishable Pulldown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.3 Perishable Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.4 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.5 Perishable Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.6 Perishable Mode Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.7 Perishable, Dehumidification − Bulb Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.8 Perishable Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.9 Perishable Mode Cooling − Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.3.10 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.3.11 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.12 Frozen Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.13 Frozen Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.14 Frozen “Heat” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.15 Frozen Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.16 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.3.17 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.3.18 Automatic Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.3.19 Defrost Initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.3.20 Defrost Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.3.21 Defrost Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4 PROTECTION MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.1 Evaporator Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
T-318 ii
4.4.2 Failure Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.3 Generator Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.4 Condenser Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.5 Arctic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.5 QUEST − CCPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.6 CONTROLLER ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.7 PRE−TRIP DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.8 DATACORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.8.2 DataCORDER Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4.8.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.4 Logging Interval (dCF03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.8.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 − dCF10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.8.8 DataCORDER Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.8.9 Pre-trip Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
4.8.10 DataCORDER Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
4.8.11 USDA Cold Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4.8.12 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4.8.13 DataCORDER Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
4.8.14 ISO Trip Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
4.9 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
4.10 CONTROLLER FUNCTION CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
4.11 CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–35
4.12 CONTROLLER PRE-TRIP TEST CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1 INSPECTION (BEFORE LOADING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2 CONNECT POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.1 Connection To 380/460 VAC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.2 Connection to 190/230VAC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.2 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.3.3 Vent Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.4 EAUTOFRESH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.4.1 eAutoFresh Pre-Trip Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4.2 eAutoFresh Start-Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4.3 eAutoFresh Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.5 CONNECT WATER-COOLED CONDENSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.5.1 Water-Cooled Condenser with Water Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.5.2 Water-Cooled Condenser with Condenser Fan Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.6 CONNECT REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.7 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.7.1 Starting the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.7.2 Stopping the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.8 PHYSICAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.8.1 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
iii T-318
5.8.2 Check Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.8.3 Start Temperature Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.8.4 Complete Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.9 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.10 PROBE DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5.11 EMERGENCY BYPASS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5.11.1 Emergency Bypass Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5.11.2 Emergency Defrost Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5.12 ARCTIC MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5.12.1 Crankcase Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY LONG IN COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES (COOLING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.9 MICROPROCESSOR MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.11 EAUTOFRESH NOT OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.12 THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.13 AUTOTRANSFORMER MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.14 WATER-COOLED CONDENSER (WCC) OR WATER PRESSURE SWITCH (WPS) . . . . . . . . . 6–6
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.1 SECTION LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.3 SERVICE VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.4 PUMP THE UNIT DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.5 REFRIGERANT LEAK CHECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6 EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6.3 Complete System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.6.4 Procedure - Partial System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7 REFRIGERANT CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.8 COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.8.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.8.2 Compressor Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
7.8.3 Compressor Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.8.4 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.8.5 Installing the Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.8.6 Compressor Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.9 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
T-318 iv
7.9.1 Checking High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.9.2 Replacing the High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.10 CONDENSER COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.11 CONDENSER FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.12 WATER-COOLED CONDENSER CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.13 FILTER−DRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.14 THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.14.1 Checking Superheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.14.2 TXV Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.15 EVAPORATOR COIL & HEATER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.15.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.15.2 Evaporator Heater Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.16 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.16.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.16.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.16.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.17 EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR CAPACITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.17.1 When To Check For A Defective Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.17.2 Removing the Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.17.3 Checking the Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.18 EVAPORATOR SECTION CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.19 SUCTION MODULATION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.19.1 Pre-check Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.20 VALVE OVERRIDE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.20.1 Checking the Stepper Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.20.2 Checking the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.20.3 SMV Emergency Repair Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.21 DPRV CHECK PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.22 AUTOTRANSFORMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
7.23 CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
7.23.1 Handling Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
7.23.2 Controller Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
7.23.3 Controller Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.23.4 Removing and Installing the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.23.5 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.24 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.24.1 Sensor Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
7.24.2 Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
7.24.3 Sensor Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
7.25 VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
7.26 EAUTOFRESH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37
7.26.1 Servicing the eAutoFresh Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37
7.26.2 Checking eAutoFresh Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
7.26.3 Servicing the eAutoFresh Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
7.27 ELECTRONIC PARTLOW TEMPERATURE RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.27.1 Replacing the Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.27.2 Changing the Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.27.3 Adjusting the Recorder Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
v T-318
7.27.4 Re-zeroing the Recording Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
7.27.5 Re-zeroing the Recording Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
7.28 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
7.29 COMPOSITE CONTROL BOX REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
7.29.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
7.29.2 Cracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
7.29.3 Chips and Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
7.29.4 Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
7.29.5 Hinge Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
7.30 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
7.31 POWER FACTOR CORRECTOR CAPACITORS (PFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
INDEX .......................................................................... INDEX–1
T-318 vi
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE NUMBER Page
Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit − Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section − Units with Center Access Panel ................................. 3–2
Figure 3.3 Compressor Section ........................................................... 3–3
Figure 3.4 Condenser Section ............................................................ 3–4
Figure 3.5 Water-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Figure 3.6 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
Figure 3.7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System .................................................... 4–1
Figure 4.2 Keypad ..................................................................... 4–2
Figure 4.3 Display Module ............................................................... 4–3
Figure 4.4 Control Module ............................................................... 4–4
Figure 4.5 Controller Operation − Perishable Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Figure 4.6 Perishable Mode Cooling ....................................................... 4–8
Figure 4.7 Perishable Mode Heating ....................................................... 4–9
Figure 4.8 Controller Operation − Frozen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
Figure 4.9 Frozen Mode ................................................................ 4–11
Figure 4.10 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
Figure 4.11 Standard Configuration Report ................................................. 4–19
Figure 4.12 DataReader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
Figure 4.13 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–34
Figure 5.1 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
Figure 5.2 Make Up Air Flow Chart ........................................................ 5–3
Figure 7.1 Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
Figure 7.2 .R-134a Manifold Gauge/Hose Set ................................................ 7–2
Figure 7.3 Service Valve ................................................................ 7–3
Figure 7.4 Refrigeration System Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
Figure 7.5 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
Figure 7.6 Exploded View of Valve Plate .................................................... 7–9
Figure 7.7 Bottom Plate Removed ......................................................... 7–9
Figure 7.8 Oil Pump and Bearing Head .................................................... 7–10
Figure 7.9 Low Profile Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
Figure 7.10 Motor End Cover ............................................................ 7–11
Figure 7.11 Equalizing Tube and Lock Screw Assembly ....................................... 7–12
Figure 7.12 Crankshaft Assembly ........................................................ 7–12
Figure 7.13 Suction Valve and Positioning Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
Figure 7.14 Piston Ring ................................................................ 7–13
Figure 7.15 High Pressure Switch Testing .................................................. 7–15
Figure 7.16 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning, Forced Circulation .............................. 7–18
Figure 7.17 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning Gravity Circulation .............................. 7–19
Figure 7.18 Thermostatic Expansion Valve Bulb ............................................. 7–20
Figure 7.19 Thermostatic Expansion Valve ................................................. 7–21
Figure 7.20 Hermetic Thermostatic Expansion Valve Bulb Location .............................. 7–21
vii T-318
Figure 7.21 Hermetic Thermostatic Expansion Valve Brazing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
Figure 7.22 Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
Figure 7.23 Suction Modulation Valve (SMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
Figure 7.24 DPRV Replacement Value Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
Figure 7.25 Controller Section of the Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
Figure 7.26 Sensor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
Figure 7.27 Sensor and Cable Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
Figure 7.28 Supply Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
Figure 7.29 Return Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
Figure 7.30 Stepper Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
Figure 7.31 Jumper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
Figure 7.32 Motor Cup Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
Figure 7.33 Electronic Partlow Temperature Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
Figure 7.34 Door Hinge Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
Figure 7.35 Insert Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
Figure 7.36 Communications Interface Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
Figure 7.37 R-134a Compressor Pressure and Motor Current Curves Vs. Ambient Temperature, Sheet 1 . 7–55
Figure 7.38 R-134a Compressor Pressure and Motor Current Curves Vs. Ambient Temperature, Sheet 2 . 7–56
Figure 8.1 LEGEND – Units with 3-Phase Evaporator Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
Figure 8.2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - Units with 3-Phase Evaporator Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
Figure 8.3 LEGEND - Units with Single Phase Evaporator Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
Figure 8.4 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - Units with Normal Evaporator Fan Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5
Figure 8.5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - Units with Single Evaporator Fan Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6
Figure 8.6 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - TransFRESH and Vent Position Sensors (VPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–7
Figure 8.7 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - Emergency Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8
Figure 8.8 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM, WIRING DIAGRAM - Electronic Partlow Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–9
Figure 8.9 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM - Units with 3-Phase Evaporator Motors (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . 8–10
Figure 8.10 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM - Units with 3-Phase Evaporator Motors (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . 8–11
Figure 8.11 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM - Units with Normal Evaporator Fan Capability (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . 8–12
Figure 8.12 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM Units with Normal Evaporator Fan Capability (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . 8–13
Figure 8.13 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM - Units with Single Evaporator Fan Capability (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . 8–14
Figure 8.14 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM - Units with Single Evaporator Fan Capability (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . 8–15
T-318 viii
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NUMBER Page
Table 3–1 Safety and Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9

Table 4–1 Keypad Function .............................................................. 4–3
Table 4–2 DataCORDER Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
Table 4–3 DataCORDER Standard Configurations ........................................... 4–20
Table 4–4 Controller Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Indications .................................................... 4–35
Table 4–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes .................................................. 4–41
Table 4–8 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments ........................................ 4–47
Table 4–9 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records ........................................... 4–48
Table 4–10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–49
Table 7–1 Valve Override Control Displays ................................................. 7–28
Table 7–2 Sensor Temperature/Resistance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
Table 7–3 Crack, Chip & Hole Repair Kit ................................................... 7–45
Table 7–4 insert Repair Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–46
Table 7–5 Drill Information .............................................................. 7–46
Table 7–6 Recommended Bolt Torque Values (Dry, Non-Lubricated for 18-8 Stainless Steel) . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
Table 7–7 Wear Limits For Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
Table 7–8 Compressor Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
Table 7–9 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart .................................... 7–52
ix T-318
SECTION 1
SAFETY SUMMARY
1.1 General Safety Notices

The following general safety notices supplement the specific warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in this
manual. They are recommended precautions that must be understood and applied during operation and mainte-
nance of the equipment covered herein. The general safety notices are presented in the following three sections
labeled: First Aid, Operating Precautions and Maintenance Precautions. A listing of the specific warnings and cau-
tions appearing elsewhere in the manual follows the general safety notices.
1.2 First Aid

An injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately.
1.3 Operating Precautions

Always wear safety glasses.
Keep hands, clothing and tools clear of the evaporator and condenser fans.
No work should be performed on the unit until all circuit breakers, start-stop switches are turned off, and power
supply is disconnected.
In case of severe vibration or unusual noise, stop the unit and investigate.
1.4 Maintenance Precautions

Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. Do not open the condenser fan grille or
evaporator access panels before turning power off, and disconnecting and securing the power plug.
Be sure power is turned off before working on motors, controllers, solenoid valves, and electrical control switches.
Tag circuit breaker and power supply to prevent accidental energizing of circuit.
Do not bypass any electrical safety devices, e.g. bridging an overload, or using any sort of jumper wires. Problems
with the system should be diagnosed and any necessary repairs performed by qualified service personnel.
When performing any arc welding on the unit or container, disconnect all wire harness connectors from the mod-
ules in both control boxes. Do not remove wire harness from the modules unless you are grounded to the unit
frame with a static safe wrist strap.
In case of electrical fire, open circuit switch and extinguish with CO2 (never use water).
1.5 Specific Warning and Caution Statements

To help identify the label hazards on the unit and explain the level of awareness each one carries, an explanation is
given with the appropriate consequences:
DANGER − Indicates an immediate hazard that WILL result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING − Warns against hazards or unsafe conditions which COULD result in severe personal injury or death.
CAUTION − Warns against potentially hazardous or unsafe practices that could result in minor personal injury,
product or property damage.
The statements listed below are applicable to the refrigeration unit and appear elsewhere in this manual. These
recommended precautions must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance of the equipment
covered herein.
! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage.Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak
testing or operating the product. Charge Only With R−134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI
Standard 700 specification.
1–1 T-318
! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. The unit may cycle the
fans and compressor unexpectedly as control requirements dictate.
! WARNING
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) before turning OFF start-stop switch (ST), unit circuit
breaker(s), and external power source.
! WARNING
Make sure the power plugs are clean and dry before connecting to power receptacle.
! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s) (CB-1 & CB-2) and the START-STOP switch (ST) are in
the “O” (OFF) position before connecting to any electrical power source.
! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before replacing the compressor.
! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a pressure regulator.
! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting power plug.
! WARNING
Oakite No. 32 is an acid. Be sure that the acid is slowly added to the water. DO NOT PUT
WATER INTO THE ACID. This will cause spattering and excessive heat.
! WARNING
Wear rubber gloves and wash the solution from the skin immediately if accidental contact
occurs. Do not allow the solution to splash onto concrete.
! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.
! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before servicing capacitor(s).
T-318 1–2
! WARNING
With power OFF discharge the capacitor before disconnecting the circuit wiring.
! WARNING
The unit power plug must be disconnected to remove power from circuit breaker CB1.
! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before removing capacitor(s).
! WARNING
Before removing the capacitors, the terminals must be checked for voltage with a multimeter.
The discharge resistors installed on the unit (capacitors) should bring the voltage to a safe
level in a minute. However, there may be a broken resistor that retains voltage for a longer
period. Therefore, it is highly recommended to wait 15 minutes and to check for voltage.
! WARNING
Before disassembly of any external compressor component make sure to relieve possible
internal pressure by loosening the bolts and tapping the component with a soft hammer to
break the seal.
! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from controller unless you are grounded to the unit frame with a
static safe wrist strap.
! CAUTION
Unplug all controller wire harness connectors before performing arc welding on any part of the container.
! CAUTION
Pre-trip inspection should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.
! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip key is pressed, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated. At the com-
pletion of Pre-Trip activity, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated.
! CAUTION
When condenser water flow is below 11 lpm (3 gpm) or when water-cooler is not in use, the
CFS switch MUST be set to position “I” or the unit will not operate properly.
1–3 T-318
! CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic testing, the unit will suspend operation awaiting oper-
ator intervention.
! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip test Auto 2 runs to completion without being interrupted, the unit will terminate
pre-trip and display “Auto 2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation until the user depresses
the ENTER key!
! CAUTION
The unit will remain in the full cooling mode as long as the emergency bypass switch is in the
BYPASS position and the MODE SWITCH is in the FULL COOL position. If the cargo may be
damaged by low temperatures, the operator must monitor container temperature and manually
cycle operation as required to maintain temperature within required limits.
! CAUTION
The unit will remain in the DEFROST mode as long as the emergency defrost switch is in the
DEFROST position. To prevent cargo damage, the operator must monitor container tempera-
ture and manually cycle operation as required to maintain temperature within required limits.
! CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the manifold gauge set, be sure set is brought to suc-
tion pressure before disconnecting.
! CAUTION
Removing the compressor motor press-fit stator in the field is not recommended. The rotor
and stator are a matched pair and should not be separated.
! CAUTION
The copper tube that connects to the oil suction strainer extends out the bottom with the bottom
plate removed. Take precautions to avoid bending or breaking it while changing crankcase positions.
! CAUTION
Ensure that the thrust washer does not fall off dowel pins while installing oil pump.
! CAUTION
The set screw on the crankshaft must be removed for this type of oil pump. (See Figure 7.8.)
T-318 1–4
! CAUTION
Use only Carrier Transicold approved Polyol Ester Oil (POE) − Castrol-Icematic SW20 compres-
sor oil with R-134a. Buy in quantities of one quart or smaller. When using this hygroscopic oil,
immediately reseal. Do not leave container of oil open or contamination will occur.
! CAUTION
Take necessary steps (place plywood over coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor from
falling into condenser coil.
! CAUTION
DO NOT disassemble piston from NEW suction modulating valve powerhead assembly. Doing
so may result in damage to piston.
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
Unplug all controller connectors before performing arc welding on any part of the container.
! CAUTION
The unit must be OFF whenever a programming card is inserted or removed from the controller
programming port.
! CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice area as this may affect sensor resistance.
! CAUTION
Do not allow the recorder stylus to snap back down. The stylus arm base is spring-loaded, and
damage may occur to the chart or the stylus force may be altered.
! CAUTION
DO NOT move the stylus arm up and down on the chart face. This will result in damage to the
stylus motor gear.
1–5 T-318
SECTION 2
INTRODUCTION
2.1 Introduction
The Carrier Transicold model 69NT40-541-300/399 series units are of lightweight aluminum frame construction,
designed to fit in the front of a container and serve as the container’s front wall.
They are one piece, self-contained, all-electric units, which include cooling and heating systems to provide precise
temperature control.
The units are suppled with a complete charge of refrigerant R-134a and compressor lubricating oil, and are ready
for operation upon installation. Forklift pockets are provided for unit installation and removal.
The base unit operates on nominal 380/460 volt, 3-phase, 50/60 hertz power. An optional autotransformer may be
fitted to allow operation on nominal 190/230, 3 phase, 50/60 hertz power. Power for the control system is provided
by a transformer, which steps the supply power down to 18 and 24 volts, single phase.
The controller is a Carrier Transicold Micro-Link 3 microprocessor. The controller operates automatically to select
cooling, holding or heating as required to maintain the desired set point temperature within very close limits. The
unit may also be equipped with an electronic temperature recorder.
The controller has a keypad and display for viewing or changing operating parameters. The display is also
equipped with lights to indicate various modes of operation.
2.2 Configuration Identification

Unit identification information is provided on a plate located near the compressor. The plate provides the unit model
number, the unit serial number and the unit parts identification number (PID). The model number identifies the
overall unit configuration while the PID provides information on specific optional equipment, factory provisions to
allow for field installation of optional equipment and differences in detailed parts.
2.3 Feature Descriptions

2.3.1 Control Box
Units are equipped with either an aluminum or composite material box, and may be fitted with a lockable door.
2.3.2 Temperature Readout
The unit may be fitted with suction and discharge temperature sensors. The sensor readings may be viewed on the
controller display.
2.3.3 Pressure Readout
The unit may be fitted with suction and discharge pressure gauges, suction and discharge transducers, or no pres-
sure readout. The transducer readings may be viewed on the controller display.
2.3.4 Compressor
The unit is fitted with a single speed reciprocating compressor.
2.3.5 Condenser Coil
The unit is fitted with a 3-row coil using 7mm tubing.
2.3.6 Evaporator
The evaporator section is equipped with a hermetic thermal expansion valve (TXV) and a heat exchanger. The unit
may have six heaters.
2.3.7 Evaporator Fan Operation
Units are equipped with single-phase or three-phase evaporator fan motors. Opening of an evaporator fan internal
protector will shut down the unit. Refer to Section 8 for schematic diagrams.
Two evaporator fan motor operation systems are available. On units with Normal Evaporator Fan Operation, open-
ing of an evaporator fan internal protector will shut down the unit. On units equipped with Single Evaporator Fan
Capability, additional relays are installed to allow the unit to continue to operate on a single fan.
2–1 T-318
2.3.8 Plate Set
Each unit is equipped with a tethered set of wiring schematic and wiring diagram plates. The plate sets are ordered
using a seven-digit base part number and a two-digit dash number.
2.4 Option Descriptions

Various options may be factory or field equipped to the base unit. These options are described in the following sub-
paragraphs.
2.4.1 Battery
The refrigeration controller may be fitted with standard replaceable batteries or a rechargeable battery pack.
Rechargeable battery packs may be fitted in the standard location or in a secure location.
2.4.2 Dehumidification
The unit may be fitted with a humidity sensor. This sensor allows setting of a humidity set point in the controller. In
dehumidification mode the controller will operate to reduce internal container moisture level.
2.4.3 USDA
The unit may be supplied with fittings for additional temperature probes, which allow recording of USDA Cold
Treatment data by the integral DataCORDER function of the Micro-Link refrigeration controller.
2.4.4 Interrogator
Units that use the DataCORDER function are fitted with interrogator receptacles for connection of equipment to
download the recorded data. Two receptacles may be fitted; one is accessible from the front of the container and
the other mounted inside the container (with the USDA receptacles).
2.4.5 Remote Monitoring
The unit may be fitted with a remote monitoring receptacle. This item allows connection of remote indicators for
COOL, DEFROST and IN RANGE. Unless otherwise indicated, the receptacle is mounted at the control box location.
2.4.6 Quest − CCPC
Compressor-Cycle Perishable Cooling (CCPC) is a method of temperature control used during steady-state perish-
able cooling that cycles the compressor on and off according to supply / return air temperature conditions.
2.4.7 Communications Interface Module
The unit may be fitted with a communications interface module. The communications interface module is a slave
module which allows communication with a master central monitoring station. The module will respond to commu-
nication and return information over the main power line. Refer to the ship master system technical manual for fur-
ther information.
2.4.8 Autotransformer
An autotransformer may be provided to allow operation on 190/230, 3-phase, 50/60 hertz power. The autotrans-
former raises the supply voltage to the nominal 380/460 volt power required by the base unit. The autotransformer
may also be fitted with an individual circuit breaker for the 230 volt power.
If the unit is equipped with an autotransformer and communications module, the autotransformer will be fitted with
a transformer bridge unit (TBU) to assist in communications.
2.4.9 Temperature Recorder
The unit may be fitted with an electronic temperature recording device.
2.4.10 Gutters
Rain gutters may be fitted over the control box and recorder section to divert rain away from the controls. The dif-
ferent gutters include standard length bolted gutters, extended length gutters, and riveted gutters.
2.4.11 Handles
The unit may be equipped with handles to facilitate access to stacked containers. These handles may include fixed
handles (located at the sides of the unit) and/or a hinged handle at the center (attached to the condenser coil cover).
T-318 2–2
2.4.12 Thermometer Port
The unit may be fitted with ports in the front of the frame for insertion of a thermometer to measure supply and/or
return air temperature. If fitted, the port(s) will require a cap and chain.
2.4.13 Water Cooling
The refrigeration system may be fitted with a water-cooled condenser. The condenser is constructed using copper-
nickel tube for seawater applications. The water-cooled condenser is in series with the air-cooled condenser and
replaces the standard unit receiver. When operating on the water-cooled condenser, the condenser fan can be
deactivated by either a water pressure switch or condenser fan switch. Depending on the unit’s configuration and
the compressor discharge temperature, the condenser fan may also be activated during water-cooled condenser
operation.
2.4.14 Back Panels
Back panel designs that may be fitted include panels of aluminum and stainless steel. Panels may have access
doors and/or hinge mounting.
2.4.15 460 Volt Cable
Various power cable and plug designs are available for the main 460 volt supply. The plug options tailor the cables
to each customer’s requirements.
2.4.16 230 Volt Cable
Units equipped with an autotransformer require an additional power cable for connection to the 230 volt source.
Various power cable and plug designs are available. The plug options tailor the cables to customer requirements.
2.4.17 Cable Restraint
Various designs are available for storage of the power cables. These options are variations of the compressor sec-
tion front cover.
2.4.18 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up)
The unit may be fitted with an upper fresh air makeup assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available with a
vent positioning sensor (VPS) and may also be fitted with screens.
2.4.19 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up)
The unit may be fitted with a lower fresh air makeup assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available with a
vent positioning sensor (VPS) and may also be fitted with screens.
2.4.20 Labels
Operating instruction and function code listing labels will differ depending on the options installed. For example,
additional operating instructions are required to describe start-up of a unit equipped with an autotransformer.
Where the labels are available with additional languages, they are listed in the parts list.
2.4.21 Controller
Two different controllers are available:
1. Re-manufactured − Controller is the equivalent of a new OEM controller and is supplied with a 12 month
warranty.
2. Repaired − Controller has had previous faults repaired and upgraded with the latest software.
NOTE
Repaired controllers are NOT to be used for warranty repairs. Only full OEM re-manufactured control-
lers are to be used.
Controllers will be factory equipped with the latest version of operational software, but will NOT be configured for a
specific model number and will need to be configured at the time of installation or sale.
2.4.22 Display Module
The unit may be fitted with a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) or a Light Emitting Diode (LED) Display.
2.4.23 Condenser Grille
Two styles of condenser grilles are available − direct bolted grilles and hinged grilles.
2–3 T-318
2.4.24 Emergency Bypass
The unit may be equipped with switches to allow emergency bypass of the controller. The EMERGENCY BYPASS
switch functions to bypass the controller in the event of controller failure. The EMERGENCY DEFROST switch
functions to bypass all controls and place the unit in the defrost mode.
2.4.25 eAutoFresh
The optional eAutoFresh venting system moderates the atmospheric level inside the container unit in response to
cargo respiration.
2.4.26 Arctic Mode
To improve operation in cold ambients, the unit may be fitted with a crankcase heater. The crankcase heater is
operated any time the unit is under power and the compressor is not running. The purpose of the heater is to warm
the compressor oil and boil off any liquid refrigerant that may be present in the crankcase.
2.4.27 Power Correction
The unit may be fitted with a set of power factor correction capacitors to assist in correction of imbalance in current
draw by the compressor.
T-318 2–4
SECTION 3
DESCRIPTION
3.1 General Description
3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section
The unit is designed for the majority of components to be accessible from the front (see Figure 3.1). The unit model
number, serial number, and parts identification number can be found on the nameplate left of the compressor.
3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent
The function of the upper or lower makeup air vent is to provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air
circulation. A manually operated venting system is located in the upper left access panel.
The optional eAutoFresh vent system is to moderate the atmospheric level in the container in response to cargo
respiration. When transporting frozen cargo loads the vent will be closed. The upper left access panel contains the
vent slide and motor assembly. It may be removed to allow entry into the evaporator section where the CO2 sensor
and drive pack are located.
Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit − Front Section
13
1
12
11
10
9 2
3
8
6
5
1. Access Panel (Evap Fan #1) / TXV / HTT) 8.Interrogator Connector (Front Left)
2. Fork Lift Pockets 9.Temperature Recorder
3. Control Box 10.
Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent Location (Blank Cover Shown)
4. Compressor 11.
TIR (Transports Internationaux Routiers) Sealing
5. Unit Serial Number, Model Number, and Parts Provisions - Typical All Panels
Identification Number (PID) Plate 12. Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent or eAutoFresh
6. Condenser Fan (Automatic Vent) panel
7. TransFRESH Communications Connector 13. Access Panel (Evaporator Fan #2)/ Humidity
Sensor / Return Temperature Sensor
-----
3–1 T-318
3.1.3 Evaporator Section
The evaporator section (Figure 3.2) contains the return temperature sensor, humidity sensor, thermostatic expan-
sion valve, dual-speed evaporator fans (EM1 and EM2), evaporator coil and heaters, defrost temperature sensor,
heat termination thermostat, and heat exchanger.
The evaporator fans circulate air through the container by pulling it in the top of the unit, directing it through the
evaporator coil where it is heated or cooled, and discharging it at the bottom.
The evaporator components are accessible by removing the upper rear panel (as shown in Figure 3.2 below).
Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section − Units with Center Access Panel
3 6
5
4
2
1
7 16
8
14
13
12
11
10
9
TXV Bulb
15 (under Insulation)
1. Evaporator Fan Motor #1 9. Heat Exchanger

2. Return Recorder Sensor (RRS) / Return Tempera- 10. Interrogator Connector (Rear) (ICR)
ture Sensor (RTS) 11. USDA Probe Receptacle PR2
3. Humidity Sensor 12. USDA Probe Receptacle PR1
4. Evaporator Fan Motor #2 13. USDA Probe Receptacle PR3
5. Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) 14. Cargo Probe Receptacle PR4
6. Heater Termination Thermostat (HTT) 15. Evaporator Coil Heaters
7. Evaporator Coil 16. TXV Bulb Routing
8. Hermetic Thermostatic Expansion Valve
-----
T-318 3–2
3.1.4 Compressor Section
The compressor section includes the compressor (with high pressure switch), power cable storage compartment,
and autotransformer.
This section also contains the suction modulating valve, discharge pressure regulating valve, discharge tempera-
ture sensor, and discharge/suction pressure transducers.
The supply temperature sensor, supply recorder sensor, and ambient sensor are located at the right side of the
compressor.
Figure 3.3 Compressor Section
5
6
7
2
8
11
10
3
9 4
12
13
22
15 14
21
16
17
20
18
19
1. Autotransformer 12. Suction Temperature Sensor

2. Power Cables and Plug 13. Quench Valve Temperature Bulb
3. Compressor Sight Glass View Port 14. Quench Valve
4. Compressor Guard 15. Access Port
5. Supply Temperature Sensor (STS) 16. Suction Modulating Valve
6. Supply Recorder Sensor 17. Suction Service Valve
7. Ambient Sensor 18. Compressor Crankcase Heater
8. Supply Air Thermometer Port 19. Compressor Motor
9. Discharge Service Valve 20. Suction Pressure Transducer
10. Discharge Temperature Sensor 21. Discharge Pressure Transducer
11. Discharge Pressure Regulating Valve 22. High Pressure Switch
-----
3–3 T-318
3.1.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section
The air-cooled condenser section (Figure 3.4) consists of the condenser fan, condenser coil, receiver with sight
glass/moisture indicator, quench valve, liquid line service valve, filter-drier, condenser pressure transducer, and
fusible plug.
The condenser fan pulls air in through the bottom of the coil and discharges it horizontally out through the condenser
fan grille.
Figure 3.4 Condenser Section
6
7
4
2 3
1
9
15
10
11
12
13
14
1. Grille and Venturi Assembly 9. Sight Glass

2. Condenser Fan 10. Fusible Plug (Rupture Disc - Alternate)
3. Key 11. Condenser Pressure Transducer
4. Condenser Fan Motor 12. Sight Glass/Moisture Indicator
5. Condenser Coil Cover 13. Filter-Drier
6. Condenser Coil 14. Liquid Line Service Valve
7. Condenser Motor Mounting Bracket 15. Quench Valve
8. Receiver
-----
T-318 3–4
3.1.6 Water-Cooled Condenser Section
The water-cooled condenser section (Figure 3.5) consists of a water-cooled condenser, sight glass, quench
expansion valve, rupture disc, condenser pressure transducer, filter-drier, water couplings, and water pressure
switch. The water-cooled condenser replaces the standard unit receiver.
Figure 3.5 Water-Cooled Condenser Section
3 4 5 6
1
9
11 10
1. Sight Glass 7. Liquid Line Service Valve

2. Water-Cooled Condenser 8. Moisture/Liquid Indicator
3. Rupture Disc 9. Coupling (Water In)
4. Condenser Pressure Transducer 10. Self Draining Coupling (Water Out)
5. Quench Valve 11. Water Pressure Switch
6. Filter-Drier
-----
3–5 T-318
3.1.7 Control Box Section
The control box (Figure 3.6) includes the manual operation switches, circuit breaker (CB-1), compressor, fan and
heater contactors, control power transformer, fuses, keypad, display module, current sensor module, controller
module and the communications interface module.For units with three-phase evaporator fan motors, two additional
contactors, PA & PB, are installed, see 2 & 3 below.
3.1.8 Communications Interface Module
The communications interface module is a slave module which allows communication between the refrigeration
unit and a ship system master central monitoring station. The module will respond to communication, and return
information over the ships main power line. Refer to the master system technical manual for further information.
Figure 3.6 Control Box Section
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CH PA PB
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1. Compressor Contactor 13. Condenser Fan Switch

2. Evap Fan Contactor PA (3-Phase only) 14. Controller Battery Pack
3. Evap Fan Contactor PB (3-Phase only) 15. Interrogator Connector (Box Location)
4. Heater Contactor 16. Control Transformer
5. Display Module 17. Evaporator Fan Contactor - E1
6. Communications Interface Module 18. Evaporator Fan Contactor - S1
7. Controller/DataCORDER Module (Controller) 19. Evaporator Fan Contactor - S2 or EF
8. Key Pad 20. Evaporator Fan Contactor - E2 or ES
9. Emergency Defrost Light 21. Condenser Fan Contactor
10. Start-Stop Switch, ST 22. Circuit Breaker (CB1) - 460V
11. Remote Monitoring Receptacle 23. Current Sensor Module
12. Manual Defrost Switch
-----
T-318 3–6
3.2 Refrigeration System Data
Number of Cylinders 6
Model 06DR
CFM 41
Weight (Dry) 118kg (260 lb)
a. Compressor/Motor
Assembly Approved Oil Castrol Icematic
Oil Charge degrees 3.6 liters (7.6 U.S. pints)
Oil Sight Glass The oil level range, with the compressor off, should
be between the bottom and one-eighth level of the
sight glass.
b. Expansion Valve Super- Verify at -18°C (0°F) con- 4.5 to 6.7°C (8 to 12°F)
heat tainer box temperature
c. Heater Termination Opens 54° (+/-3) C = 130° (+/-5) F
Thermostat Closes 38° (+/-4) C = 100° (+/-7) F
Cutout 25 (+/-1.0) kg/cm2 = 350 (+/-10) psig
d. High Pressure Switch
Cut-In 18 (+/-0.7) kg/cm2 = 250 (+/-10) psig
! WARNING
injury and / or property damage.
Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating the product.
Charge Only With R-134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.
e. Refrigerant R-134a Conforming to AHRI standard 700 specifications.
Unit Configuration Charge Requirements − R-134a
f. Refrigerant Charge Water-Cooled Condenser 4.9kg (10.75 lbs)
Receiver 4kg (8.75 lbs)
NOTE:
When replacing components (g.), (h.) and (i.), refer to installation instructions included with replacement part.
Melting point 99°C = (210°F)
g. Fusible Plug*
Torque* 6.2 to 6.9mkg (45 to 50ft-lbs)
h. Sight Glass/Moisture Torque 8.9 to 9.7mkg (65 to 70ft-lbs)
Indicator
Bursts at 35 +/- 5%kg/cm2 = (500 +/- 5%psig)
i. Rupture Disc
Torque (P/N 14-00215-03) 1.4 to 2mkg (10 to 15 ft-lbs)
Condenser Fan Starts Condenser fan will start if condenser pressure is
greater than 14.06kg/cm2 (200psig) OR the con-
j. Condenser Pressure denser fan is OFF for more than 60 seconds.
Transducer Condenser Fan Stops Condenser fan will stop if condenser pressure is
less than 9.14kg/cm2 (130psig) AND the condenser
fan remains ON for at least 30 seconds.
k. Unit Weight Refer to unit model number plate.
Cut-In 0.5 +/-0.2kg/cm2 (7 +/-3psig)
l. Water Pressure Switch
Cutout 1.6 +/-0.4kg/cm2 (22 +/-5psig)
m. Discharge Pressure Factory Setting 32.7 +/-2.5kg/cm2 (72 +/-5.5psig)
Regulating Valve
* Rupture Disc, part number 14-00215-04 may be installed as an alternate for the receiver mounted fusible plug.
3–7 T-318
3.3 Electrical Data
CB-1 Trips at 29 amps
a. Circuit Breaker CB-2 (50 amps) Trips at 62.5amps
CB-2 (70 amp) Trips at 87.5amps
17.6amps @ 460VAC
b. Compressor Motor Full Load Amps (FLA)
(with current limiting set at 21 amps)
380 VAC, Single Phase, 460 VAC, Single Phase,
50 Hz 60 Hz
Full Load Amps 1.3 amps 1.6 amps
c. Condenser Horsepower 0.43 hp 0.75 hp

Fan Motor Rotations Per Minute 1425 rpm 1725 rpm
Voltage and Frequency 360 − 460 VAC +/- 2.5 Hz 400 − 500 VAC +/- 2.5 Hz
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required.
Rotation Counter-clockwise when viewed from shaft end.
Single-Phase Evaporator Fan Motors
380 VAC/50 Hz 460 VAC/60 Hz
Full Load Amps High Speed 1.6 2.0
Full Load Amps Low Speed 0.8 1.0
Nominal Horsepower 0.70 0.84
High Speed
Low Speed
d. Evaporator Rotations Per Minute 2850 rpm 3450 rpm
Fan Motor(s) High Speed
Rotations Per Minute 1425 rpm 1725 rpm
Low Speed
Voltage & Frequency using 180 − 230VAC +/-1.25 Hz 200 − 250VAC +/-1.5 Hz
power autotransformer
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required
Rotation CW when viewed from shaft end
Three-Phase Evaporator Fan Motors
380 VAC/3 PH/50 Hz 460 VAC/3 PH/60 Hz
Full Load Amps High Speed 1.0 1.2
Full Load Amps Low Speed 0.6 0.6
High Speed
e. Evaporator Low Speed
Fan Motor(s) Rotations Per Minute 2850 rpm 3450 rpm
High Speed
Rotations Per Minute 1425 rpm 1725 rpm
Low Speed
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required
Rotation CW when viewed from shaft end
T-318 3–8
Number of Heaters 6
f. Evaporator Coil Rating 750 watts +5/-10% each @ 230 VAC
Heater Resistance (cold) 66.8 to 77.2 ohms @ 20°C (68°F)
Type Sheath
Control Circuit 7.5 amps (F3A, F3B)
Controller/DataCORDER 5 amps (F1 & F2)
g. Fuses Emergency Defrost 5amps (FED)
Drain Line Heater 5 amps (FDH)
Humidity Power Transformer 5amps (FH)
h. Compressor Crankcase Heater 180watts @ 460VAC
Orange wire Power
Red wire Output
Brown wire Ground
Input voltage 5vdc
Output voltage 0 to 3.3vdc
i. Humidity Sensor
Output voltage readings verses relative humidity (RH) percentage:
30% 0.99V
50% 1.65V
70% 2.31V
90% 2.97V
j. Controller Setpoint Range -30 to +30°C (-22 to +86°F)
3.4 Safety and Protective Devices

Unit components are protected from damage by safety and protective devices listed in the following table. These
devices monitor the unit operating conditions and open a set of electrical contacts when an unsafe condition occurs.
Table 3–1 Safety and Protective Devices
Unsafe Condition Safety Device Device Setting
Circuit Breaker (CB-1) − Manual Reset Trips at 29 amps (460VAC)
Excessive current draw Circuit Breaker (CB-2, 50 amp) −Manual Reset Trips at 62.5 amps (230VAC)
Circuit Breaker (CB-2, 70 amp) −Manual Reset Trips at 87.5 amps (230VAC)
Excessive current draw in Fuse (F3A & F3B) 7.5 amp rating
control circuit
Excessive current draw by Fuse (F1 & F2) 5 amp rating
controller
Excessive current draw by Fuse (FED) 5 amp rating
emergency defrost circuit
Excessive condenser fan motor Internal Protector (IP-CM) − Automatic Reset N/A
winding temperature
Excessive compressor motor Internal Protector (IP-CP) − Automatic Reset N/A
winding temperature
Excessive evaporator fan Internal Protector(s) (IP-EM) − Automatic Reset N/A
motor(s) winding temperature
Abnormal pressures / Fusible Plug − Receiver 99°C = (210°F)
temperatures in the high Rupture Disc − Water-Cooled Condenser 35kg/cm2 = (500psig)
refrigerant side
Abnormally high discharge High Pressure Switch (HPS) − Automatic Reset Open at 25kg/cm@ (350psig)
pressure Close at 18kg/cm@ (250psig)
3–9 T-318
3.5 Refrigeration Circuit
Starting at the compressor (see Figure 3.7, upper schematic), the suction gas is compressed to a higher pressure
and temperature.
The gas flows through the discharge service valve into the pressure regulating valve. During periods of low ambi-
ent operation, the discharge pressure regulating valve modulates the flow of refrigerant to maintain a pre-set mini-
mum discharge pressure. Refrigerant gas then moves into the air-cooled condenser. When operating with the air-
cooled condenser active, air flowing across the coil fins and tubes cools the gas to saturation temperature. By
removing latent heat, the gas condenses to a high pressure/high temperature liquid and flows to the receiver,
which stores the additional charge necessary for low temperature operation.
When operating with the water-cooled condenser active (see Figure 3.7, lower schematic), the refrigerant gas
passes through the air-cooled condenser and enters the water-cooled condenser shell. The water flowing inside
the tubing cools the gas to saturation temperature in the same manner as the air passing over the air-cooled con-
denser. The refrigerant condenses on the outside of the tubes and exits as a high temperature liquid. The water-
cooled condenser also acts as a receiver, storing excess refrigerant.
The liquid refrigerant continues through the liquid line service valve, the filter-drier (which keeps refrigerant clean
and dry), and a heat exchanger (that increases sub-cooling of the liquid) to the thermostatic expansion valve
(TXV).
As the liquid refrigerant passes through the variable orifice of the expansion valve, the pressure drops to suction
pressure. In this process some of the liquid vaporizes to a gas (flash gas), removing heat from the remaining liquid.
The liquid exits as a low pressure, low temperature, saturated mix. Heat is then absorbed from the return air by the
balance of the liquid, causing it to vaporize in the evaporator coil. The vapor then flows through the suction tube
back to the compressor.
The TXV is activated by the bulb strapped to the suction line near the evaporator outlet. The valve maintains a con-
stant superheat at the coil outlet regardless of load conditions.
The TXV is a mechanical device that regulates the flow of liquid to the evaporator coil in order to maintain a rela-
tively constant degree of superheat in the gas leaving the evaporator regardless of suction pressure.
The flow of liquid to the evaporator is regulated by a variable orifice which opens to increase refrigerant flow
(decrease superheat), or closes to decrease refrigerant flow (increase superheat). The variable orifice is controlled
by the temperature sensing bulb which is strapped to the suction line near the evaporator outlet.
During periods of low load, the suction modulating valve (SMV) decreases flow of refrigerant to the compressor.
This action balances the compressor capacity with the load and prevents operation with low coil temperatures. In
this mode of operation, the quench valve will open as required to provide sufficient liquid refrigerant flow into the
suction line for cooling of the compressor motor. The quench valve senses refrigerant condition entering the com-
pressor and modulates the flow to prevent entrance of liquid into the compressor.
The refrigeration system is also fitted with a condenser pressure transducer, which feeds information to the control-
ler. When operating on the air-cooled condenser, the controller programming will operate the condenser fan so as
to attempt to maintain discharge pressures above 130psig in low ambients. At ambients below 27°C (80°F), the
condenser fan will cycle on and off depending on condenser pressure and operating times.
1. The condenser fan will start if the condenser pressure is greater than 200psig OR the condenser fan has been
OFF for more than 60 seconds.
2. The condenser fan will stop if the condenser pressure is less than 130psig AND the condenser fan has been
running for at least 30 seconds.
At ambients above 27°C (80°F), condenser pressure control is disabled and the condenser fan runs continuously.
On systems fitted with a water pressure switch, the condenser fan will be off when there is sufficient pressure to
open the switch. If water pressure drops below the switch cut out setting, the condenser fan will be automatically
started. When operating a system fitted with a condenser fan switch, the condenser fan will be off when the switch
is placed in the “O” position. The condenser fan will be on when the switch is placed in the “I” position.
T-318 3–10
Figure 3.7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic
EVAPORATOR THERMOSTATIC
EXPANSION VALVE
(TXV)
TXV BULB
CONDENSER
HEAT EXCHANGER
DISCHARGE PRESSURE
REGULATING VALVE
QUENCH
VALVE BULB
SERVICE VALVE
MODULATING VALVE QUENCH VALVE FUSIBLE PLUG
SIGHT GLASS
FILTER DRIER PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
Suction
SERVICE SIGHT GLASS /
Liquid VALVE MOISTURE INDICATOR
Discharge RECEIVER
Circuit with Receiver

EVAPORATOR
THERMOSTATIC
EXPANSION VALVE
(TXV)
TXV BULB
CONDENSER
HEAT EXCHANGER
DISCHARGE PRESSURE
REGULATING VALVE RUPTURE DISC
MODULATING VALVE
MOISTURE
QUENCH INDICATOR
VALVE BULB
SERVICE VALVE
WATER-COOLED
CONDENSER
SIGHT GLASS
SERVICE VALVE
Suction FILTER DRIER
QUENCH VALVE
Liquid
Discharge Circuit with Water-Cooled Condenser
3–11 T-318
SECTION 4
MICROPROCESSOR
4.1 Temperature Control Microprocessor System

The temperature control Micro-Link 3 microprocessor system (see Figure 4.1) consists of a keypad, display mod-
ule, control module (controller), and interconnecting wiring. The controller houses the temperature control software
and the DataCORDER Software. The temperature control software functions to operate the unit components as
required to provide the desired cargo temperature and humidity.
The DataCORDER software functions to record unit operating parameters and cargo temperature parameters for
future retrieval. Coverage of the temperature control software begins with Section 4.2. Coverage of the DataCORDER
software is provided in Section 4.8.
The keypad and display module serve to provide user access and readouts for both of the controller functions, tem-
perature control, and DataCORDER. The functions are accessed by keypad selections and viewed on the display
module. The components are designed to permit ease of installation and removal.
Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System
DISPLAY MODULE
CONTROL MODULE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL SOFTWARE

KEYPAD
CONFIGURATION OPERATIONAL ALARMS Pre-trip

SOFTWARE SOFTWARE
INTERROGATION
CONNECTOR
CONFIGURATION FUNCTION TO
VARIABLE DISPLAY
CODE (Cd)
(CnF##)
DataCORDER SOFTWARE
Computer Device
With DataLINE
DATA Software
CONFIGURATION OPERATIONAL ALARMS STORAGE
SOFTWARE SOFTWARE MEMORY
Operation/Config.
CONFIGURATION TO PCMCIA CARD
FUNCTION TO
VARIABLE DISPLAY DISPLAY Data Bank
CODE (dC)
(dCF## read only) (Scrollback) PCMCIA CARD
4–1 T-318
4.1.1 Keypad
The keypad (Figure 4.2) is mounted on the right-hand side of the control box. The keypad consists of 11 push but-
ton switches that act as the user’s interface with the controller. Descriptions of the switch functions are provided in
Table 4–1.
Figure 4.2 Keypad
CODE PRE
SELECT TRIP
MANUAL
ALARM
DEFROST/
LIST
INTERVAL
ENTER
RETURN C
SUPPLY F
BATTERY ALT
POWER MODE
4.1.2 Display Module

The display module (Figure 4.3) consists of five digital displays and seven indicator lights. Indicator lights include:
1. COOL − White or Blue LED: Energized when the refrigerant compressor is energized.
2. HEAT − Orange LED: Energized to indicate heater operation in heat mode, defrost mode, or dehumidification.
3. DEFROST − Orange LED: Energized when the unit is in the defrost mode.
4. IN RANGE − Green LED: Energized when the controlled temperature probe is within specified tolerance of
set point.
NOTE
The controlling probe in perishable range is the SUPPLY air probe and the controlling probe in frozen
range is the RETURN air probe.
5. SUPPLY − Yellow LED: Energized when the supply air probe is used for control. When this LED is illumi-
nated, the temperature displayed in the AIR TEMPERATURE display is the reading at the supply air probe.
This LED will flash if dehumidification or humidification is enabled.
6. RETURN − Yellow LED: Energized when the return air probe is used for control. When this LED is illumi-
nated, the temperature displayed in the AIR TEMPERATURE display is the reading at the return air probe.
This LED will flash if dehumidification or humidification is enabled.
7. ALARM − Red LED: Energized when an active or an inactive shutdown alarm is in the alarm queue.
T-318 4–2
Table 4–1 Keypad Function
Key Function
CODE SELECT Accesses function codes.
PRE TRIP Displays the pre-trip selection menu.
Discontinues pre-trip in progress.
ALARM LIST Displays alarm list and clears the alarm queue.
MANUAL DEFROST / Displays selected defrost mode. Depressing and holding the Defrost interval key for five seconds
INTERVAL will initiate defrost using the same logic as if the optional manual defrost switch was toggled on.
ENTER Confirms a selection or saves a selection to the controller.
Arrow Up Change or scroll a selection upward.
Pre-trip advance or test interruption.
Arrow Down Change or scroll a selection downward. Pre-trip repeat backward
RETURN / SUPPLY Displays non-controlling probe temperature (momentary display).
Celsius / Fahrenheit Displays alternate English/Metric scale (momentary display). When set to degrees
Fahrenheit, pressure is displayed in psig and vacuum in “/hg. “P” appears after the val-
ue to indicate psig and “i” appears for inches of mercury.
When set to degrees Celsius, pressure readings are in bars. “b” appears after the
value to indicate bars.
BATTERY POWER Initiate battery backup mode to allow set point and function code selection if AC pow-
er is not connected.
ALT MODE This key is pressed to switch the functions from the temperature software to the
DataCORDER Software. The remaining keys function the same as described above
except the readings or changes are made to the DataCORDER programming.
Figure 4.3 Display Module
COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data
4.1.3 Controller
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
Unplug all controller wire harness connectors before performing arc welding on any part of the
container.
! CAUTION
Do not attempt to use an ML2i PC card in an ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are physically
different and will result in damage to the controller.
4–3 T-318
NOTE
Do not attempt to service the controller. Breaking the seal will void the warranty.
The Micro-Link 3 controller is a single module microprocessor as shown in Figure 4.4. It is fitted with test points,
harness connectors and a software card programming port.
4.2 Controller Software

The controller software is a custom designed program that is subdivided into the configuration software and the
operational software. The controller software performs the following functions:
a. Control supply or return air temperature to required limits, provide modulated refrigeration control, electric heat
control, and defrost. Defrost is performed to clear buildup of frost and ice from the coil to ensure continuous
conditioned air delivery to the load.
b. Provide default independent readouts of set point and supply or return air temperatures.
c. Provide ability to read, and if applicable, modify the configuration software variables, operating software function
codes, and alarm code indications.
d. Provide a Pre-trip step-by-step checkout of refrigeration unit performance, including proper component operation,
electronic and refrigeration control operation, heater operation, probe calibration, pressure limiting, and current
limiting settings.
e. Provide battery-powered ability to access or change selected codes and set points without AC power
connected.
f. Provide the ability to reprogram the software through the use of a memory card.
4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables)

The configuration software is a variable listing of the components available for use by the operational software. This
software is factory-installed in accordance with the equipment fitted and options listed on the original purchase order.
Changes to the configuration software are required only when a new controller has been installed or a physical
change has been made to the unit such as the addition or removal of an option. A configuration variable list is pro-
vided in Table 4–4. Change to the factory-installed configuration software is achieved via a configuration card or by
communications.
Figure 4.4 Control Module
1 2 3 3 4 5 3 6 7 3 8 3
EN12830
CONTROLLER With
(7.5A)
(7.5A)
(5A)
KB
(5A)
MA
OC1
F3A
MC
MB
F3B
KA
TP
KH
F2
F1
CARRIER
Micro-Link3 DataCORDER S/N: 0491162 REV 5147 YYWW: 1035 12-00579-00
T B C1 KE KD KC 59980
1. Mounting Screw 5. Fuses

2. Micro-Link 3 Controller 6. Control Circuit Power Connection (located on back
3. Connectors of controller)
4. Test Points 7. Software Programming Port
8. Battery Pack
-----
T-318 4–4
4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes)
The operational software is the actual operation programming of the controller which activates or deactivates com-
ponents in accordance with current unit operation conditions and selected modes of operation.
The programming is divided into function codes. Some of the codes are read only, while the remaining codes may
be user configured. The value of the user configurable codes can be assigned in accordance with user desired
mode of operation. A list of the function codes is provided in Table 4–5.
To access the function codes:
a. Press CODE SELECT, then press an arrow key until the left window displays the desired function code.
b. The right window will display the selected function code value for five seconds before returning to the default
display mode.
c. If additional time is required, pressing the ENTER key will extend the display time to 30 seconds.
4.3 Modes of Operation

General operation sequences for cooling, heating, and defrost are provided in the following sub-paragraphs. Sche-
matic representation of controller actions are provided in Figure 4.5 and Figure 4.8.
The operational software responds to various inputs. These inputs come from the temperature and pressure sen-
sors, the temperature set point, the settings of the configuration variables and the function code assignments. The
action taken by the operational software will change if any of the inputs changes. Overall interaction of the inputs is
described as a “mode” of operation. The modes of operation include perishable (chill) mode and frozen mode.
Descriptions of the controller interaction and modes of operation are provided in the following sub-paragraphs.
4.3.1 Perishable Mode Temperature Control

The unit is capable of maintaining supply air temperature to within +/- 0.25°C (+/- 0.5°F) of set point. Supply air
temperature is controlled by positioning of the suction modulation valve (SMV), cycling of the compressor, and
cycling of the heaters.
In Perishable Mode, the controller maintains the supply air temperature at set point, the SUPPLY indicator light is
illuminated and the default reading on the display window is the supply temperature sensor reading.
When the supply air temperature enters the in-range temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE light will
energize.
When CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to -10°C, perishable mode is active with set points above -10°C
(+14°F). When CnF26 is set to -5°C, perishable mode is active with set points above -5°C (+23°F).
4.3.2 Perishable Pulldown

When the system is in Perishable Pulldown Mode, the highest priority is given to bringing the container down to set
point. When cooling from a temperature that is more than 5°C (9°F) above set point, the system will be in Perish-
able Pulldown Mode, and the SMV will open to reduce the pulldown time.
However, pressure and current limit functions may restrict the valve if either exceeds the preset value.
4.3.3 Perishable Steady State

Perishable Steady State is used to maintain the control temperature near a setpoint that is above the heat lockout
temperature.
The operational software is designed so the SMV will begin to close as the set point is reached. The SMV will con-
tinue to close and restrict refrigerant flow until the capacity of the unit and the load are balanced.
If the temperature drops below the set point, the compressor will remain running for a few minutes. This is to
accommodate any initial undershoot which might occur. After this time has expired and the temperature is 0.2°C
(0.4°F) or greater below the set point, the compressor will be turned OFF.
If the temperature drops to 0.5°C (0.9°F) below set point, the heaters will be energized. The heaters will de-energize
when the temperature rises to 0.2°C (0.4°F) below the set point. The compressor will not restart until the tempera-
ture rises to 0.2°C (0.4°F) above the set point and three minutes have elapsed since the last compressor turn off.
4–5 T-318
4.3.4 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation
Perishable Idle Mode is used when it is unnecessary to run the compressor to maintain control temperature. If the
controller has determined that cooling is not required or the controller logic determines suction pressure is at the
low pressure limit, the unit will transition to Perishable Idle Mode. During Perishable Idle Mode, the compressor is
turned off, but the evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout the container. If temperature rises
+0.2°C above set point, the unit will transition back to perishable steady state.
4.3.5 Perishable Heating

When it is necessary to raise the control temperature, the system will enter Perishable Heating Mode. If the tem-
perature drops to 0.5°C (0.9°F) below set point, the unit will transition to Perishable Heating Mode, and the heaters
will be energized. The unit will transition back to Perishable Idle Mode when the temperature rises to 0.2°C (0.4°F)
below the set point, and the heaters will de-energize.
Figure 4.5 Controller Operation − Perishable Mode
Perishable Mode Pull Down

(Only Applicable to Perishable Mode)
Controller Set Point ABOVE ï10qC (+14qF),
Controller Set Point ABOVE ï10qC (+14qF),
orï5qC (+23qF) optionally
orï5qC (+23qF) optionally
+5qC
(+9qF)
Cooling, Cooling
Modulating
+.20qC
Set Set
Point Cooling, Point
ï.20qC Air Circulation ï.20qC Modulating
ï.20qC ï.20qC
Air Circulation
ï.50qC
ï.50qC
Heating
Heating
Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature
4.3.6 Perishable Mode Dehumidification

Dehumidification is provided to reduce the humidity levels inside the container. Dehumidification is activated when
a humidity value is set at Cd33. The yellow SUPPLY LED will flash ON and OFF every second to indicate that
dehumidification is active. Once dehumidification is active and the following conditions are satisfied, the controller
will activate the heat relay to begin dehumidification.
1. The humidity sensor reading is above the humidity set point (Cd33).
2. The unit is in the perishable steady state mode, and the supply air temperature is less than 0.25°C (0.45°F)
above set point.
3. The heater debounce timer (three minutes) has timed out.
4. Heater termination thermostat (HTT) is closed.
T-318 4–6
If the above conditions remain true for at least one hour, the evaporator fans will switch from high speed to low speed.
Evaporator fan speed will then switch every hour, as long as the 4 conditions are met (see Bulb Mode, Section 4.3.7
for different evaporator fan speed options).
If any condition except for item (1) becomes false OR if the relative humidity sensed is 2% below the dehumidifica-
tion set point, the high speed evaporator fans will be energized.
During dehumidification, power is applied to the defrost heaters. This added heat load causes the controller to open
the SMV to match the increased heat load while still holding the supply air temperature very close to the set point.
Opening the SMV reduces the temperature of the evaporator coil surface, which increases the rate at which water
is condensed from the passing air. Removing water from the air reduces the relative humidity. When the relative
humidity sensed is 2% below set point, the controller de-energizes the heat relay. The controller will continue to
cycle heating to maintain relative humidity below the selected set point. If the dehumidification mode is terminated
by a condition other than the humidity sensor, e.g., an out-of-range or compressor shutdown condition, the heat
relay is de-energized immediately.
Two timers are activated during dehumidification to prevent rapid cycling and consequent contactor wear:
1. Heater debounce timer (three minutes) − The heater debounce timer is started whenever the heater contac-
tor status is changed. The heat contactor remains energized (or de-energized) for at least three minutes
even if the set point criteria is satisfied.
2. Out-of-range timer (five minutes) − The out-of-range timer is started to maintain heater operation during a
temporary out-of-range condition. If supply air temperature remains outside of the user selected in-range
setting for more than five minutes, the heaters will be de-energized to allow the system to recover. The out-
of-range timer starts as soon as the temperature exceeds the in-range tolerance value set by Cd30.
4.3.7 Perishable, Dehumidification − Bulb Mode
Bulb mode is an extension of dehumidification which allows changes to the evaporator fan speed and/or defrost
termination set points.
Bulb mode is active when Cd35 is set to “Bulb.” Once bulb mode is activated, the user may then change the dehu-
midification mode evaporator fan operation from the default (speed alternates from low to high each hour) to con-
stant low or constant high speed. This is done by toggling Cd36 from its default of “alt” to “Lo” or “Hi” as desired. If
low speed evaporator fan operation is selected, the user has the additional capability of selecting dehumidification
set points from 60 to 95% (instead of the normal 65 to 95%).
In addition, if bulb mode is active, Cd37 may be set to override the previous defrost termination thermostat (DTT)
settings (refer to Section 4.3.17). The temperature at which the DTT will be considered “open” may be changed [in
0.1°C (0.2°F) increments] to any value between 25.6°C (78°F) and 4°C (39.2°F). The temperature at which the
DTT is considered closed for interval timer start or demand defrost is 10°C (50°F) for “open” values from 25.6°C
(78°F) down to a 10°C (50°F) setting. For “open” values lower than 10°C, the “closed” values will decrease to the
same value as the “open” setting. Bulb mode is terminated when:
1. Bulb mode code Cd35 is set to “Nor.”
2. Dehumidification code Cd33 is set to “Off.”
3. The user changes the set point to one that is in the frozen range.
When bulb mode is disabled by any of the above, the evaporator fan operation for dehumidification reverts to “alt”
and the DTS termination setting resets to the value determined by CnF41.
4.3.8 Perishable Economy
Economy fan mode is an extension of Perishable Mode, and is only applicable to units with two speed evaporator
fan motors. Economy Mode is activated Cd34 is set to “ON.” Economy Mode is provided for power saving pur-
poses, and is generally used during the transportation of temperature tolerant cargo or non-respiration items that
do not require high airflow for removing respiration heat. There is no active display that indicates Economy Mode
has been activated. To check for economy fan mode, perform a manual display of Cd34.
In order to achieve economy mode, a perishable set point must be selected prior to activation. When economy
mode is active, the evaporator fans will be controlled as follows:
• At the start of each cooling or heating cycle, the evaporator fans will run in high speed for three minutes.
• After the initial three minutes, they will then be switched to low speed any time supply air temperature is
within +/-0.25°C (0.45°F) of set point and return air temperature is less than or equal to supply air tempera-
ture +3°C (5.4°F).
• The fans will continue to run in low speed for one hour. At the end of the hour, the evaporator fans will switch
back to high speed and the cycle will be repeated.
4–7 T-318
4.3.9 Perishable Mode Cooling − Sequence of Operation
NOTE
In Standard Perishable Mode, the evaporator motors run in high speed. In Economy Fan Mode, fan
speed is varied.
NOTE
In low temperature ambients, the condenser fan will be cycled by the controller to maintain proper con-
densing pressure.
a. With supply air temperature above set point and decreasing, the unit will cooling with the condenser fan
motor (CF), compressor motor (CH), evaporator fan motors (EF) energized, and the white COOL light illumi-
nated (see Figure 4.6).
Figure 4.6 Perishable Mode Cooling
ENERGIZED
DEïENERGIZED
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
FOR FULL DIAGRAM AND
LEGEND, SEE SECTION 7
POWER TO
CONTROLLER
SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER
SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER
NOTE: HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR FAN SHOWN. FOR LOW SPEED

CONTACT TE IS DE-ENERGIZED AND CONTACT TV IS ENERGIZED
b. When supply air temperature decreases to a predetermined tolerance above set point (Cd30), the green IN
RANGE light is illuminated.
c. As the air temperature continues to fall, modulating cooling starts as the supply air temperature approaches
set point.
d. The controller continuously monitors supply air temperature. Once the supply air temperature falls below set
point and 0% SMV position is reached, the controller periodically records the supply air temperature, set
point, and time. A calculation is then performed to determine temperature drift from set point over time. If the
calculation determines that cooling is no longer required, contacts TC and TN are opened to de-energize the
compressor motor and the condenser fan motor.
e. The evaporator fan motors continue to run to circulate air throughout the container. The green IN−RANGE
light remains illuminated as long as the supply air is within tolerance of set point.
f. When the supply air temperature increases to 0.2°C (0.4°F) above set point and the three minute off time
has elapsed, relays TC and TN are energized to restart the compressor and condenser fan motor. The white
COOL light is also illuminated.
4.3.10 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation
NOTE
The unit will heat only when in the Perishable Mode, relay TH is electronically locked out when in the
Frozen Mode.
T-318 4–8
a. If the supply air temperature decreases 0.5°C (0.9°F) below set point, the system enters the heating mode
(see Figure 4.5). The controller closes contacts TH (see Figure 4.7) to allow power flow through the heat
termination thermostat (HTT) to energize the heaters (HR). The orange HEAT light is also illuminated. The
evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout the container.
b. When the supply temperature rises to 0.2°C (0.4°F) below set point, contact TH opens to de-energize the
heaters. The HEAT light is also de-energized. The evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout
the container.
c. The safety heater termination thermostat (HTT) is attached to an evaporator coil circuit and will open the
heating circuit if overheating occurs.
Figure 4.7 Perishable Mode Heating
ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
POWER TO
CONTROLLER
SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER
SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER
4.3.11 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control

In Frozen Mode, the controller maintains the return air temperature at set point, the yellow RETURN indicator light is illu-
minated, and the default reading on the display window is the return temperature sensor (RTS) reading.
When the return air temperature enters the in-range temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE light will
energize.
With CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to -10°C, frozen mode is active with set points at or below -10°C
(+14°F). With CnF26 set to -5°C, frozen mode is active at or below -5°C (+23°F).
When the system is in Frozen Mode, the highest priority is given to bringing the container down to set point.
When return air temperature is greater than 0.2°C (0.4°F) above the frozen set point and the three minute time
delay has been met, the unit will always operate at full capacity with the suction modulation valve open as allowed
by current and pressure limiting.
4.3.12 Frozen Steady State

Frozen range cargoes are not sensitive to minor temperature changes. The method of temperature control
employed in frozen range takes advantage of this fact to greatly improve the energy efficiency of the unit. Tempera-
ture control in frozen range is accomplished by cycling the compressor on and off as the load demand requires.
The unit will operate in the conventional frozen mode when the controller set point is at or below the frozen range
and Economy Mode (Cd34) is set to “OFF.”
4–9 T-318
Figure 4.8 Controller Operation − Frozen Mode
Frozen Mode
Controller Set Point at or BELOW ï10qC (+14qF),
or ï5qC (+23qF) optionally
+2.5qC
(+4.5qF)
Cooling
+.20qC
Set Point
ï.20qC
Air Circulation
Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature
4.3.13 Frozen Idle Mode

When temperature drops to set point minus 0.2°C (0.4°F) and the compressor has run for at least five minutes, the
unit will transition to the frozen idle mode. The compressor is turned off and the evaporator fans continue to run to
circulate air throughout the container. If temperature rises above set point +0.2°C, (0.4°F) the unit will transition back
to the frozen steady state mode.
NOTE
On start up of the unit, SMV will reset to a known open position. This is accomplished by assuming the
valve was fully open, driving it fully closed, resetting the percentage open to zero, then opening to a
known 21% staging position.
To prevent rapid cycling of the compressor, a three minute compressor off time must be satisfied before the com-
pressor will restart. Under a condition of rapidly changing return air temperature, the time delay may allow the
return air temperature to rise slightly above set point temperature before the compressor can restart.
4.3.14 Frozen “Heat” Mode
If the temperature drops 10°C (18°F) below set point, the unit will transition to the frozen “heating” mode. The evap-
orator fans are brought to high speed, and the heat from the fans is circulated through the container. The unit will
transition back to frozen steady state when the temperature rises back to the transition point.
4.3.15 Frozen Economy Mode
In order to activate economy frozen mode operation, a frozen set point temperature must be selected, and Cd34
(Economy Mode) set to “ON.” When economy mode is active, the system will perform normal frozen mode opera-
tions except that the entire refrigeration system, excluding the controller, will be turned off when the control tem-
perature is less than or equal to the set point -2°C.
T-318 4–10
After an off-cycle period of 60 minutes, the unit will turn on high speed evaporator fans for three minutes and then
check the control temperature. If the control temperature is greater than or equal to the frozen set point +0.2°C, the
unit will restart the refrigeration system and continue to cool until the previously mentioned off-cycle temperature
criteria are met. If the control temperature is less than the frozen set point +0.2°C, the unit will turn off the evapora-
tor fans and restart another 60 minute off-cycle.
4.3.16 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation

NOTES
1. In the Frozen Mode the evaporator motors run in low speed.
2. In low temperature ambients, the condenser fan will be cycled by the controller to maintain proper
condensing pressure.
a. When the return air temperature is above set point and decreasing, the unit will be cooling with the con-
denser fan motor (CF), compressor motor (CH), evaporator fan motors (ES) energized and the white COOL
light illuminated (see Figure 4.9).
b. When the return air temperature decreases to a predetermined tolerance above set point, the green IN-
RANGE light is illuminated.
c. When the return air temperature decreases to 0.2°C (0.4°F) below set point, contacts TC and TN are opened to
de-energize the compressor and condenser fan motors. The white COOL light is also de-energized.
d. The evaporator fan motors continue to run in low speed to circulate air throughout the container.
e. The green IN-RANGE light remains illuminated as long as the return air is within tolerance of set point.
f. When the return air temperature increases to 0.2°C (0.4°F) above set point and the three minute off time has
elapsed, relays TC and TN are energized to restart the compressor and condenser fan motors. The white
COOL light is also illuminated.
Figure 4.9 Frozen Mode
ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
POWER TO
CONTROLLER
SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER
SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER
4.3.17 Defrost
Defrost is initiated to remove ice buildup from the evaporator coil which can obstruct air flow and reduce the cooling
capacity of the unit. The defrost cycle may consist of up to three distinct operations. The first is de-icing of the coil,
the second is a probe check cycle and the third is snap freeze.
De-icing of the coil consists of removing power to the cooling components (compressor, evaporator fans, con-
denser fan), and turning on the heaters, which are located below the evaporator coil. During normal operation, de-
icing will continue until temperatures indicate that the ice on the coil has been removed, proper air flow has been
restored, and the unit is ready to control temperature efficiently.
4–11 T-318
After de-icing, and depending on unit configuration, a Defrost/Probe Check and/or Snap Freeze may occur:
• During Defrost / Probe Check, the evaporator fans are allowed to run for a period of time after de-icing in
order to validate the accuracy of the temperature sensors, and confirm that defrost was executed properly.
Refer to Probe Diagnostics, Section 5.10 for additional information.
• Defrost / Snap Freeze allows the system to cool for a period of time after de-icing, with the evaporator fans
turned off. This allows for the removal of latent de-icing heat from the evaporator coils, and freezes any
remaining moisture that might otherwise be blown into the container.
4.3.18 Automatic Defrost
In perishable mode, perishable-pull down mode, or frozen mode, automatic defrost starts with an initial defrost set
to three hours and then adjusts the interval to the next defrost based on the accumulation of ice on the evaporator
coil. In this way, defrosts are scheduled to occur only when necessary.
In frozen mode, once the frozen set point has been reached, automatic defrost will set the time interval to 12 hours
for the first two defrosts, and then adjust to 24 hours thereafter.
All defrost interval times reflect the number of compressor run time hours since the last defrost cycle. The minimum
defrost interval in the automatic setting is three hours while the maximum is 24, refer to Defrost Intervals for more
information, Section 4.3.20.
In frozen mode the amount of actual time necessary to accumulate defrost interval time will exceed the defrost
interval time by a factor of two to three depending on the compressor duty-cycle. Defrost interval time is only accu-
mulated when the compressor is running, and the Defrost Termination Sensor (DTS) reads less than 10°C (50°F),
at which point the Defrost Termination Thermostat (DTT) is considered closed.
If defrost does not terminate correctly and temperature reaches the set point of the Heat Termination Thermostat
(HTT), the HTT will open to de-energize the heaters (AL59 & AL60). If the HTT does not open and termination does
not occur within two hours, the controller will terminate defrost. AL60 will be activated to inform of a possible DTS
failure.
4.3.19 Defrost Initiation

Initiation of defrost is dependent on the state of the Defrost Temperature Thermostat (DTT). The functionality of the
DTT is controlled by the system software, based on the temperature reading of the Defrost Termination Sensor
(DTS). In the case of a failed DTS, the RTS may be used to determine the state of the DTT.
Defrost cannot be initiated when the DTT is considered OPEN, because an open DTT indicates that the tempera-
ture is too high for ice to build up. Defrost can only occur when the temperature sensed by the DTS is low enough
to CLOSE the DTT.
If the DTT is closed, the unit is in Perishable or Frozen Mode, and the Controlled Atmosphere Vent is closed (if
applicable), then defrost can be initiated when any one of the following additional conditions become true:
1. Manual defrost is initiated by the operator. The Manual Defrost Switch (MDS), located on the front of the unit, is
a momentary toggle switch that must be held closed until defrost is initiated. The MDS is ignored during Pretrip,
and the DTT must be considered CLOSED for MDS activation to work.
Manual defrost can also be initiated by pressing the MANUAL DEFROST/INTERVAL key for greater than 5 sec-
onds, or pressing the PRE TRIP key and the ALT MODE key for greater than 5 seconds. If the two key method is
used the display may show “P” or “Dc” while waiting for defrost to initiate.
2. The Defrost Interval Timer reaches or exceeds the Defrost Interval.
3. During Pretrip, defrost may occur during tests P-8, and P-10. Defrost is forced during Pretrip test P-9.
4. Temperature Probe Diagnostics logic determines that a Probe Check is necessary based on temperature
values currently reported by the supply and return probes.
5. An Initiate Defrost command is sent via communications.
6. The controller Demand Defrost configuration variable (CnF40) is set to “In” and the unit has been in pull
down operation for over 2.5 hours without reaching set point.
7. The microprocessor can determine if defrost is required by calculating the difference between return air tem-
perature and supply air temperature (Delta T). If the temperature difference between return air and supply
air is too great, it indicates reduced airflow over the evaporator coil, and a defrost cycle may be required:
a. In Perishable Pull Down - Defrost will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 12°C, DTT is
closed, and 90 minutes of compressor run time have been recorded.
b. In Frozen Mode - Defrost will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 16°C, DTT is closed, and 90
minutes of compressor run time have been recorded.
T-318 4–12
c. In Perishable Steady State - A baseline Delta T is used to determine when defrost should be activated.
The baseline is recorded after completion of an initial defrost cycle. In order to record a baseline Delta T,
the unit must be cooling, and the evaporator fans and heaters must remain in a stable state for a period
of five minutes. Defrost will then be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 4°C above the baseline,
the DTT is closed, and 90 minutes of compressor run time have been recorded.
NOTE
During defrost, the Defrost Relay is energized, the orange DEFROST light is illuminated, and the
orange HEAT light is illuminated.
Defrost may be initiated any time the defrost temperature sensor reading falls below the controller DTT set point.
Defrost will terminate when the defrost temperature sensor reading rises above the DTT set point. The DTT is not a
physical component. It is a controller setting that acts as a thermostat, “closing” (allowing defrost) when the defrost
temperature sensor reading is below the set point and “opening” (terminating or preventing defrost) when the sensor
temperature reading is above set point. When the unit is operating in bulb mode (refer to Section 4.3.7), special set-
tings may be applicable.
If the controller is programmed with the Lower DTT setting option, the defrost termination thermostat set point may
be configured to the default of 25.6°C (78°F) or lowered to 18°C (64°F). When a request for defrost is made
through the manual defrost switch, communications or probe check the unit will enter defrost if the DTT reading is
at or below the DTT setting. Defrost will terminate when the DTS reading rises above the DTT setting. When a
request for defrost is made with the defrost interval timer or by demand defrost, the defrost temperature setting
must be below 10°C (50°F).
When defrost is initiated, the controller closes the EEV, opens contacts TC, TN and TE (or TV) to de-energize the
compressor, condenser fan and evaporator fans. The white COOL light is also de-energized. The controller then
closes contacts TH to supply power to the heaters, and the orange DEFROST light is illuminated. When the DTS
reading rises to the DTT setting, the de-icing operation is terminated.
Figure 4.10 Defrost

ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
POWER TO
CONTROLLER
SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER
SIGNAL TO SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
4.3.20 Defrost Interval

There are two modes for defrost initiation, user-selected timed intervals and automatic control.
The user-selected values are (OFF), 3, 6, 9, 12, 24 hours, AUTO, or PuLS; factory default is 3 hours.
Automatic defrost starts with an initial defrost at three hours and then adjusts the interval to the next defrost based
on the accumulation of ice on the evaporator coil. Following a start-up or after termination of defrost, the time will
not begin counting down until the DTS reading falls below set point (DTT closed). If the reading of DTS rises above
set point (DTT open) any time during the timer count down, the interval is reset and the countdown starts over.
4–13 T-318
4.3.21 Defrost Related Settings
If probe check (CnF31) is configured to SPECIAL, the unit will proceed to the next operation (snap freeze or
terminate defrost). If CnF31 is configured to STANDARD, the unit will perform a probe check. The probe check is a
test that compares temperature sensor readings to determine if any sensors have failed.
If probe check fails, the system will run for eight minutes to validate. At the end of eight minutes, probe alarms will be
set or cleared based on the current conditions.
When the return air temperature falls to 7°C (45°F), the controller ensures that the defrost temperature sensor
(DTS) reading has dropped to 10°C or below. If it has not it indicates a failed DTS, a DTS failure alarm is triggered
and the defrost mode is operated by the return temperature sensor (RTS).
If CnF33 is configured to snap freeze, the controller will sequence to this operation. The snap freeze consists of running
the compressor without the evaporator fans in operation for a period of 4 minutes at 100% capacity. When the snap
freeze is completed, defrost is terminated.
If CnF23 is configured to “SAv” (save), then the value of the defrost interval timer will be saved at power down and
restored at power up. This option prevents short power interruptions from resetting an almost expired defrost
interval, and possibly delaying a needed defrost cycle.
CnF11 determines whether the operator will be allowed to chose “OFF” as a defrost interval option.
CnF64 determines whether the operator will be allowed to choose “PuLS” as a defrost interval option. For units
operating with “PuLS” selected, defrost interval is determined by the unit temperature setpoint and the Evaporator
Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting (Cd60). When the unit temperature setpoint is equal to or less than the
Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting, the defrost interval is set to 6 hours. Otherwise, the defrost interval is
determined using the Automatic Defrost Interval Determination logic. In either case, “PuLS” remains displayed in
this function select code.
After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Interval is used until the next defrost termination,
the next time the DTT contacts are OPEN, or the next time power to the control is interrupted. If the previous value
or the new value is “OFF”, the newly selected value will be used immediately.
If any Auto Pretrip sequence is initiated, Cd27 will be set to ‘AUTO’ unless CnF49 (OEM Reset) is set to “Custom” AND
CnF64 (Evaporator Fan Pulsing Logic) configuration variable is set to IN, in which case Cd27 will be set to “PuLS”.
4.4 Protection Modes of Operation

4.4.1 Evaporator Fan Operation
Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will shut down a unit with Normal Evaporator Fan Operation.
(CnF32 set to 2EFO). On units equipped with Single Evaporator Fan Capability (CnF32 set to 1EFO), additional
relays are installed to allow the unit to continue to operate on a single fan (refer to Table 4–4).
4.4.2 Failure Action

Function code Cd29 may be operator set to allow continued operation in the event the control sensors are reading out of
range. The factory default is full system shutdown (refer to Table 4–5).
4.4.3 Generator Protection

Function codes Cd31 and Cd32 may be operator set to control start-up sequence of multiple units and operating cur-
rent draw. The factory default allows on demand starting of units and full current draw (refer to Table 4–5).
4.4.4 Condenser Pressure Control

When configuration variable CnF14 is set to “In,” the condenser pressure control logic is activated to maintain dis-
charge pressures above 130psig in low temperature ambients. The logic turns the condenser fan on or off in accor-
dance with the condenser pressure transducer reading (refer to Table 4–4). The function is enabled when the
following conditions are met:
1. The ambient sensor reading is less than or equal to 27°C (80°F), and
2. Voltage/Frequency ratio is less than or equal to 8.38.
When the above conditions are met, either pressures or timers may dictate a change of state from OFF to ON or
ON to OFF. If the condenser fan is OFF, it will be energized if saturated condensing pressure is greater than
200psig OR if the condenser fan has been OFF for a variable time period of up to 60 seconds depending on the
ambient temperature. As the ambient temperature increases, the amount of time that the condenser fan is ener-
gized will correspondingly increase towards the maximum. If the condenser fan is ON, it will de-energize only if the
saturated condensing pressure is less than 130psig and the condenser fan has been running for a minimum of
thirty seconds depending on the ambient temperature.
T-318 4–14
4.4.5 Arctic Mode
With arctic mode enabled (configuration variable CnF29 set to “In”), there will be a 30-minute time delay at startup
if the ambient is colder than -10.0°C (14°F). When the START/STOP switch is placed in the “I” (ON) position, the
controller will energize the compressor crankcase heater. Operation of the heater will warm the oil and boil off any
liquid refrigerant that may be present in the crankcase.
If Pre-Trip is initiated during the 30 minute time period, Pre-Trip will be allowed to run normally. Once Pre-Trip is
over, the controller will revert to its normal control mode logic (refer to Table 4–4).
4.5 Quest − CCPC

Compressor-Cycle Perishable Cooling (CCPC) is a method of temperature control during steady-state perishable cool-
ing that cycles the compressor on and off according to return air temperature.
To be eligible for steady-state control the unit must first complete a “setpoint pulldown” phase and a “CCPC pulldown”
phase:
• During setpoint pulldown supply air temperature is controlled according to the unit’s nominal supply air
setpoint.
• During CCPC pulldown the supply air temperature is lowered somewhat relative to the nominal setpoint.
Evaporator fans are forced to operate at high speed.
Steady-state CCPC control maintains the same lowered supply air temperature as was used during CCPC pulldown. The
compressor cycles on and off according to return air high and low limits. Depending on the fan mode of operation selected,
the evaporator fans may be programmed to run at low speed some or all of the time according to the control logic.
4.6 Controller Alarms

Alarm display is an independent controller software function. If an operating parameter is outside of expected range or
a component does not return the correct signals back to the controller, an alarm is generated. A listing of the alarms is
provided in Table 4–6.
The alarm philosophy balances the protection of the refrigeration unit and that of the refrigerated cargo. The action
taken when an error is detected always considers the survival of the cargo. Rechecks are made to confirm that an
error actually exists.
Some alarms requiring compressor shutdown have time delays before and after to try to keep the compressor on line.
An example is alarm code “LO,” (low main voltage), when a voltage drop of over 25% occurs, an indication is given on
the display, but the unit will continue to run.
An alarm is indicated by flashing an alarm code on the display panel, and for some alarms, by the alarm light
illuminating.
When an Alarm Occurs:
a. The red alarm light will illuminate for “20 series” alarms.
b. If a detectable problem is found to exist, its alarm code will be alternately displayed with the set point on the
left display.
c. The user should scroll through the alarm list to determine what alarms exist or have existed. Alarms must be
diagnosed and corrected before the Alarm List can be cleared.
To Display Alarm Codes:
a. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALARM LIST key. This accesses the Alarm List Display Mode,
which displays any alarms archived in the Alarm Queue.
b. The alarm queue stores up to 16 alarms in the sequence in which they occurred. The user may scroll
through the list by depressing an ARROW key.
c. The left display will show “AL##,” where ## is the alarm number sequentially in the queue.
d. The right display will show the actual alarm code. “AA##” will display for an active alarm, where “##” is the
alarm code. Or “IA##” will display for an inactive alarm.
e. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list if any alarms are active.
f. “CLEAr” is displayed if all alarms are inactive. The alarm queue may then be cleared by pressing the
ENTER key. The alarm list will clear and “-----” will be displayed.
4–15 T-318
NOTE
AL26 is active when all of the sensors are not responding. Check the connector at the back of the con-
troller, if it is loose or unplugged, reconnect it. Then run a pretrip test (P5) to clear AL26.
4.7 Pre−Trip Diagnostics

Pre-trip diagnostics is an independent controller function that will suspend normal refrigeration controller activities and
provide preprogrammed test routines. The test routines include Auto Mode testing, which automatically performs a
pre-programmed sequence of tests or Manual Mode testing, which allows the operator to select and run any of the
individual tests.
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip key is pressed, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated. At the com-
pletion of Pre-Trip activity, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated.
Testing may be initiated by use of the keypad or via communication, but when initiated by communication, the con-
troller will execute the entire battery of tests (auto mode).
At the end of a pre-trip test, the message “P,” “rSLts” (pretest results) will be displayed. Pressing ENTER will allow
the user to see the results for all subtests. The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for all the tests run to
completion.
A detailed description of the pre-trip tests and test codes is provided in Table 4–7. Detailed operating instructions
are provided in Section 5.9.
4.8 DataCORDER
4.8.1 Description
The Carrier Transicold “DataCORDER” software is integrated into the controller and serves to eliminate the tem-
perature recorder and paper chart. DataCORDER functions may be accessed by keypad selections and viewed on
the display module. The unit is also fitted with interrogation connections (see Figure 4.1), which may be used with
the Carrier Transicold DataReader to download data. A personal computer with Carrier Transicold DataLINE soft-
ware may also be used to download data and configure settings.
The resulting file uses a proprietary file format that protects it from potential tampering or altering of data. There-
fore, once downloaded, all dcx files shall be considered secured. The DataCORDER consists of:
• Configuration Software
• Operational Software
• Data Storage Memory
• Real Time Clock (with internal battery backup)
• Six Thermistor Inputs
• Interrogation Connections
• Power Supply (battery pack)
T-318 4–16
The DataCORDER performs the following functions:
a. Logs data at 15, 30, 60 or 120 minute intervals and stores two years’ of data (based on one hour interval).
b. Records and displays alarms on the display module.
c. Records results of Pre-trip testing.
d. Records DataCORDER and temperature control software generated data and events as follows:
• Container ID Change
• Software Upgrades
• Alarm Activity
• Battery Low (Battery Pack)
• Data Retrieval
• Defrost Start and End
• Dehumidification Start and End
• Power Loss (with and without battery pack)
• Power Up (with and without battery pack)
• Remote Probe Temperatures in the Container (USDA cold treatment and cargo probe recording)
• Return Air Temperature
• Set Point Change
• Supply Air Temperature
• Real Time Clock Battery (Internal) Replacement
• Real-Time Clock Modification
• Trip Start
• ISO Trip Header (When entered via Interrogation program)
• Economy Mode Start and End
• “Auto 1/Auto 2/Auto 3” Pre-trip Start and End
• Bulb Mode Start
• Bulb Mode changes
• Bulb Mode End
• USDA Trip Comment
• Humidification Start and End
• USDA Probe Calibration
• Fresh Air Vent Position
4.8.2 DataCORDER Software

The DataCORDER Software is subdivided into Operational Software, Configuration Software, and the Data Memory.
a. Operational Software
The Operational Software reads and interprets inputs for use by the Configuration Software. The inputs are labeled
Function Codes. There are 35 function codes (see Table 4–8), which the operator may access to examine the cur-
rent input data or stored data. To access these codes, do the following:
1. Press the ALT. MODE and CODE SELECT keys.
2. Press an arrow key until the left window displays the desired code number. The right window will display the
value of this item for five seconds before returning to the normal display mode.
3. If a longer time is desired, press the ENTER key to extend the time to 30 seconds.
b. Configuration Software
The configuration software controls the recording and alarm functions of the DataCORDER. Reprogramming to the
factory-installed configuration is achieved via a configuration card. Changes to the software may be made using
the DataLINE integration software.
A list of the configuration variables is provided in Table 4–2. Descriptions of DataCORDER operation for each variable
setting are provided in the following paragraphs.
4–17 T-318
4.8.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02)
Two modes of operation may be configured, the Standard Mode and the Generic Mode.
a. Standard Mode
In the standard mode, the user may configure the DataCORDER to record data using one of seven standard configura-
tions. The seven standard configuration variables, with their descriptions, are listed in Table 4–3.
The six thermistor inputs (supply, return, USDA #1, #2, #3, and cargo probe) and the humidity sensor input will be
generated by the DataCORDER. An example of a report using a standard configuration is shown in Figure 4.11.
NOTE
The DataCORDER software uses the supply and return recorder sensors. The temperature control
software uses the supply and return temperature sensors.
b. Generic Mode
The generic recording mode allows user selection of the network data points to be recorded. The user may select up to a
total of eight data points for recording. A list of the data points available for recording follows. Changing the configuration
to generic and selecting which data points to record may be done using the Carrier Transicold Data Retrieval Program.
1. Control mode 11. Discrete inputs (See Note)
2. Control temperature 12. Ambient sensor
3. Frequency 13. Compressor suction sensor
4. Humidity 14. Compressor discharge sensor
5. Phase A current 15. Return temperature sensor
6. Phase B current 16. Supply temperature sensor
7. Phase C current 17. Defrost temperature sensor
8. Main voltage 18. Discharge pressure transducer
9. Suction modulation valve percentage 19. Suction pressure transducer
10. Discrete outputs (See Note) 20. Condenser pressure transducer
4.8.4 Logging Interval (dCF03)

The user may configure four time intervals between data recordings. Data is logged at exact intervals in accordance
with the real-time clock. The clock is factory set at Greenwich Mean Time.
4.8.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04)

The user may configure the format in which the thermistor readings are recorded. The low resolution is a 1 byte format
and the normal resolution is a 2 byte format. The low resolution requires less memory and records temperature in
0.25°C (0.45°F) increments when in perishable mode or 0.5°C (0.9°F) increments when in the frozen mode. The normal
resolution records temperature in 0.01°C (0.02°F) increments for the entire range.
Table 4–2 DataCORDER Configuration Variables

Configuration # Title Default Option
dCF01 (Future Use) -- --
dCF02 Sensor Configuration 2 2,5,6,9,54,64,94
dCF03 Logging Interval (Minutes) 60 15,30,60,120
dCF04 Thermistor Format Short Low, Normal
dCF05 Thermistor Sampling Type A A,b,C
dCF06 Controlled Atmosphere/Humidity Sampling Type A A,b
dCF07 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 1 A Auto, On, Off
dCF10 Alarm Configuration Cargo Sensor A Auto, On, Off
T-318 4–18
Figure 4.11 Standard Configuration Report
Raw Data Report for ABCU1234567

Aug 22, 2012 to Sept 05, 2012
System Configuration at the Time of Interrogation:
Interrogated On Sept 05, 2012
Extracted by DataLine Rev 2.1
Controller Software: 5154

Controller Serial #: 04163552
Bill of Lading #: 1
Origin: Origin Date:

Destination: Discharge Date:
Comment: DataLine Tool
Probe Calibration Readings: USDA1: 0.0 USDA2: 0.0 USDA3: 0.0 Cargo: 0.0
Temperature Units: Centigrade
__________________________________________________________________________________
Aug 22, 2012
Setpoint: 1.66, Container : Serial : 04163552
9 Sensors Logged at 15 Minute Interval
Sensor Format Resolution
F1=Help 234567aa.dcx ML3 ABCU1234567 04163552 08/22/2012 09/05/2012
Container: ABCU1234567, Serial: 04163552

Aug 22, 2012
Aug 23, 2012
Aug 24, 2012
Aug 25, 2012
Aug 26, 2012
F1=Help 234567aa.dcx ML3 ABCU1234567 04163552 08/22/2012 09/05/2012
4–19 T-318
Table 4–3 DataCORDER Standard Configurations
Standard Configuration Description
2 sensors (dCF02=2) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
5 sensors (dCF02=5)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
6 sensors (dCF02=6) 3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input
9 sensors (dCF02=9) Not Applicable
6 sensors (dCF02=54) 3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
7 sensors (dCF02=64)
1 humidity input
10 sensors (dCF02=94) 1 humidity input
3 CA inputs (NOT APPLICABLE)
4.8.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06)

Three types of data sampling are available - average, snapshot, and USDA. When configured to average, the aver-
age of readings taken every minute over the recording period is recorded. When configured to snapshot, the sen-
sor reading at the log interval time is recorded. When USDA is configured, the supply and return temperature
readings are averaged and the three USDA probe readings are snapshot.
4.8.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 − dCF10)

The USDA and cargo probe alarms may be configured to OFF, ON or AUTO.
If a probe alarm is configured to OFF, then the alarm for this probe is always disabled.
If a probe alarm is configured to ON, then the associated alarm is always enabled.
If the probes are configured to AUTO, they act as a group. This function is designed to assist users who keep their
DataCORDER configured for USDA recording, but do not install the probes for every trip. If all the probes are dis-
connected, no alarms are activated. As soon as one of the probes is installed, then all of the alarms are enabled
and the remaining probes that are not installed will give active alarm indications.
The DataCORDER will record the initiation of a pre-trip test (refer to Section 4.7) and the results of each of the
tests included in pre-trip. The data is time-stamped and may be extracted via the Data Retrieval program. Refer to
Table 4–9 for a description of the data stored in the DataCORDER for each corresponding pre-trip test.
4.8.8 DataCORDER Power-Up

The DataCORDER may be powered up in any one of four ways:
1. Normal AC power: The DataCORDER is powered up when the unit is turned on via the stop-start switch.
2. Controller DC battery pack power: If a battery pack is installed, the DataCORDER will power up for communi-
cation when an interrogation cable is plugged into an interrogation receptacle.
3. External DC battery pack power: A 12-volt battery pack may also be plugged into the back of the interroga-
tion cable, which is then plugged into an interrogation port. No controller battery pack is required with this
method.
4. Real-time Clock demand: If the DataCORDER is equipped with a charged battery pack and AC power is not pres-
ent, the DataCORDER will power up when the real-time clock indicates that a data recording should take place.
When the DataCORDER is finished recording, it will power down.
T-318 4–20
During DataCORDER power-up, while using battery-pack power, the controller will perform a hardware voltage
check on the battery. If the hardware check passes, the Controller will energize and perform a software battery volt-
age check before DataCORDER logging. If either test fails, the real-time clock battery power-up will be disabled
until the next AC power cycle. Further DataCORDER temperature logging will be prohibited until that time.
An alarm will be generated when the battery voltage transitions from good to bad indicating that the battery pack
needs recharging. If the alarm condition persists for more than 24 hours on continuous AC power, the battery pack
needs replacement.
4.8.9 Pre-trip Data Recording
The DataCORDER will record the initiation of a Pre-trip test (refer to Section 4.7) and the results of each of the
tests included in pre-trip. The data is time-stamped and may be extracted via the Data Retrieval program. Refer to
Table 4–9 for a description of the data stored in the DataCORDER for each corresponding pre-trip test.
4.8.10 DataCORDER Communications
Data retrieval from the DataCORDER can be accomplished by using the DataReader, DataLINE, DataBANK Card,
or a communications interface module.
NOTE
A DataReader, DataLine/DataView, or a communications interface module display of Communication
Failed is caused by faulty data transfer between the DataCORDER and the data retrieval device.
Common causes include:
1. Bad cable or connection between DataCORDER and data retrieval device.

2. PC communication port(s) unavailable or mis-assigned.
3. Chart Recorder Fuse (FCR) blown.
Communication identification for the models covered herein may be obtained on the Container Products Group
Information Center by authorized Carrier Transicold Service Centers.
a. DataReader
The Carrier Transicold Data Reader (see Figure 4.12) is a simple to operate hand held device designed to extract
data from the DataCORDER and upload it to a PC. The Data Reader has the ability to store multiple data files.
Refer to Data Retrieval manual 62-10629 for a more detailed explanation of the DataReader.
Figure 4.12 DataReader
DataReader
1 2
3
8
7
4
6 5
1. OFF 5. ENTER
2. ON 6. Escape
3. UP Arrow 7. DOWN Arrow
4. RIGHT Arrow 8. LEFT Arrow
-----
4–21 T-318
b. DataBANK™ Card
The DataBANK™card is a PCMCIA card that interfaces with the controller through the programming slot and can
download data at a much faster rate when compared to the PC or DataReader. Files downloaded to the DataBANK
card files are accessible through an Omni PC Card Drive. The files can then be viewed using the DataLine software.
c. DataLine
The DataLINE software for a personal computer is supplied on both floppy disks and CD. This software allows
interrogation, configuration variable assignment, screen view of the data, hard copy report generation, cold treat-
ment probe calibration, and file management. Refer to Data Retrieval manual 62-10629 for a more detailed expla-
nation of the DataLINE interrogation software. The DataLine manual may be found on the Internet at
www.container.carrier.com.
d. Communications Interface Module
The communications interface module is a slave module which allows communication with a master central monitoring
station. The module will respond to communication and return information over the main power line. With a remote moni-
toring unit installed, all functions and selectable features that are accessible at the unit may be performed at the master
station. Retrieval of all DataCORDER reports may also be performed. Refer to the master system technical manual for fur-
ther information.
4.8.11 USDA Cold Treatment
Sustained cold temperature has been employed as an effective post harvest method for the control of Mediterra-
nean and certain other tropical fruit flies. Exposing infested fruit to temperatures of 2.2°C (36°F) or below for spe-
cific periods results in the mortality of the various stages of this group of insects.
In response to the demand to replace fumigation with this environmentally sound process, Carrier has integrated
Cold Treatment capability into its microprocessor system. These units have the ability to maintain supply air tem-
perature within one-quarter degree Celsius of setpoint and record minute changes in product temperature within
the DataCORDER memory, thus meeting USDA criteria. Information on USDA is provided in the following sub-
paragraphs.
a. USDA Recording
A special type of recording is used for USDA cold treatment purposes. Cold treatment recording requires three
remote temperature probes be placed at prescribed locations in the cargo. Provision is made to connect these
probes to the DataCORDER via receptacles located at the rear left-hand side of the unit. Four or five receptacles are
provided. The four three-pin receptacles are for the probes and fifth, five-pin, receptacle is the rear connection for
the Interrogator. The probe receptacles are sized to accept plugs with tricam coupling locking devices. A label on the
back panel of the unit shows which receptacle is used for each probe.
The standard DataCORDER report displays the supply and return air temperatures. The cold treatment report displays
USDA #1, #2, #3, and the supply and return air temperatures. Cold treatment recording is backed up by a battery so
recording can continue if AC power is lost.
b. USDA/ Message Trip Comment
A special feature is incorporated which allows the user to enter a USDA (or other) message at the head of a data
report. The maximum message length is 78 characters. Only one message will be recorded per day.
4.8.12 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure

The following is a summary of the steps required to initiate a USDA Cold Treatment:
a. Calibrate the three USDA probes by ice bathing the probes and performing the calibration function with the
DataReader or a personal computer. This calibration procedure determines the probe offsets and stores
them in the controller for use in generating the cold treatment report. Refer to the Data Retrieval manual 62-
10629 for more details.
b. Pre-cool the container to the treatment temperature or below.
c. Install the DataCORDER module battery pack (if not already installed).
d. Place the three probes. The probes are placed into the pulp of the fruit (at the locations defined in the follow-
ing table) as the product is loaded.
T-318 4–22
Sensor 1 Place in pulp of the product located next to the return air intake.
Place in pulp of the product five feet from the end of the load for 40-foot contain-
Sensor 2 ers, or three feet from the end of the load for 20-foot containers. This probe
should be placed in a center carton at one-half the height of the load.
Place in pulp of product five feet from the end of the load for 40-foot containers
Sensor 3 or three feet from the end of the load for 20-foot containers. This probe should
be placed in a carton at a side wall at one-half the height of the load.
e. To initiate USDA recording, connect the personal computer and perform the configuration as follows:
1. Enter ISO header information.

2. Add a trip comment if desired.
3. Configure for five probes (s, r, P1, P2, P3).
4. Configure for one-hour logging interval.
5. Set the sensor configuration at USDA.
6. Configure for two byte memory storage format.
7. Perform a “trip start.”
4.8.13 DataCORDER Alarms

Alarm display is an independent DataCORDER function. If an operating parameter is outside of the expected range
or a component does not return the correct signals back to the DataCORDER an alarm is generated. The Data-
CORDER contains a buffer of up to eight alarms. A listing of the DataCORDER alarms is provided in Table 4–10.
Refer to Section 4.8.7 for configuration information.
To display alarm codes:
a. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALT. MODE & ALARM LIST keys. This accesses the Data-
CORDER Alarm List Display Mode, which displays any alarms stored in the Alarm Queue.
b. To scroll to the end of the alarm list, press the UP ARROW. Depressing the DOWN ARROW key will scroll
the list backward.
c. The left display will show “AL#” where # is the alarms number in the queue. The right display will show
“AA##,” if the alarm is active, where ## is the alarm number. “IA##,” will show if the alarm is inactive.
d. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list if any alarms are active. “CLEAr” is displayed if all the
alarms in the list are inactive.
e. If no alarms are active, the Alarm Queue may be cleared. The exception to this rule is the DataCORDER
Alarm Queue Full alarm (AL91), which does not have to be inactive in order to clear the alarm list. To clear
the alarm list:
1. Press the ALT. MODE & ALARM LIST keys.
2. Press the UP/DOWN ARROW key until “CLEAr” is displayed.
3. Press the ENTER key. The alarm list will clear and “-----” will be displayed.
4. Press the ALARM LIST key. “AL” will show on the left display and “-----” on the right display when there
are no alarms in the list.
5. Upon clearing of the Alarm Queue, the Alarm light will be turned off.
4.8.14 ISO Trip Header

DataLINE provides the user with an interface to view/ modify current settings of the ISO trip header through the
ISO Trip Header screen.
The ISO Trip Header screen is displayed when the user clicks on the “ISO Trip Header” button in the “Trip Func-
tions” Group Box on the System Tools screen.
F9 function - Provides the user with a shortcut for manually triggering the refresh operation. Before sending modi-
fied parameter values, the user must ensure that a successful connection is established with the controller.
4–23 T-318
If the connection is established with the DataCORDER, the current contents of the ISO Trip Header from the Data-
CORDER will be displayed in each field. If the connection is not established with the DataCORDER, all fields on
the screen will be displayed as “Xs.” If at any time during the display of the ISO Trip Header screen the connection
is not established or is lost, the user is alerted to the status of the connection.
After modifying the values and ensuring a successful connection has been made with the DataCORDER, click on
the “Send” button to send the modified parameter values.
The maximum allowed length of the ISO Trip Header is 128 characters. If the user tries to refresh the screen or close
the utility without sending the changes made on the screen to the DataCORDER, the user is alerted with a message.
4.9 Controller Configuration Variables

Table 4–4 Controller Configuration Variables
Config # Title Default Option
CnF01 Bypass Valve Enable In 0-in, 1-out
CnF02 Evaporator Fan Speed dS (Dual) 0-single, 1-dual
CnF03 Control Sensors FOUr (quad) 0-duAL, 1-quad
CnF04 Dehumidification Mode On 0-on, 1-off
CnF07 Unit Selection, 20FT/ 40FT/45FT 40ft 0-40ft, 1-20ft, 2-45ft
CnF08 Single Phase/Three Phase Motor 1Ph 0-1phe, 1-3phe
CnF10 Two Speed Compressor Logic Out (Single) 0-single, 1-dual
CnF11 Defrost “Off” Selection noOFF 0-noOFF, 1-OFF
CnF12 TXV/Solenoid Quench Valve Out (TXV) 0-quench, 1-TXV
CnF13 Unloader Out 0-in, 1-out
CnF14 Condenser Pressure Control (CPC) In 0-in, 1-out
CnF15 Discharge Temperature Sensor Out 0-in, 1-out
CnF16 DataCORDER Present On (Yes) 0-off, 1-on
CnF17 Discharge Pressure Sensor Out (No) 0-out (No), 1-in (Yes)
CnF18 Heater Old (Low Watt) 0-old, 1-new (High Watt)
CnF19 Controlled Atmosphere Out (No) 0-out, 1-in (Yes)
CnF20 Suction Pressure Sensor Out (No) 0-out, 1-in (Yes)
CnF21 Autotransformer Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF22 Economy Mode Option OFF 0-off, 1-full, 2-std, 3-cust
CnF23 Defrost Interval Timer Save Option noSAv 0-no_sav, 1-sav
CnF24 Enable Long Pre-Trip Test Series Auto1 0-auto1, 1-auto2, 3-aAuto3
CnF25 Enable Pre-Trip Data Recording rSLtS 0-rSLts, 1-dAtA
CnF26 Heat Lockout Change Option Set to -10C 0= -10C, 1= -5C
CnF27 Suction Temperature Display Option Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF28 Enable Bulb Mode Option NOr 0-normal, 1-bulb
CnF29 Enable Arctic Mode Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF30 Compressor Size 41cfm 0-41cfm, 1-37cfm
CnF31 Probe Check Option SPEC 0-Std, 1-Special
CnF32 Enable Single Evaporator Fan Option 2EF0 (dual) 0-dual, 1-single_enable
CnF33 Enable Snap Freeze Option OFF 0-off, 1-snap
CnF34 Temperature Unit Display bOth (C&F) 0-enable both, 1-F, 2-C
CnF35 Enable Humidification Mode OFF 0-off, 1-on
T-318 4–24
Table 4–4 Controller Configuration Variables
Config # Title Default Option
CnF36 SMV Type PWM 0-PWM, 1-Spor, 2-Alco
CnF37 Electronic Temperature Recorder rEtUR 0-return, 1-supp, 2-both
CnF38 Quench Bypass Valve Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF39 Expanded Current Limit Range Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF40 Demand Defrost Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF41 Lower DTT Setting Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF42 Enable Auto Pre-trip Start Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF43 Pulldown Defrost Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF44 Autoslide Enabled Out 0-out, 1-Lo, 2-Up
CnF45 Low Humidity Enabled Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF47 Fresh Air Vent Position Sensor Out 0-out, 1-up, 2-low, 3-cust
CnF48 CFS / WPS Override Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF49 OEM Reset Option Off 0-off, 1-std, 2-spec, 3-cust
CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Selection Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF51 Timed Defrost Disable Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF54 Remote Evaporator Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF60 Compressor-Cycle Perishable Cooling Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF61 ACT ASC Control Enable Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF62 Extended Temperature Control Enable Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF63 CCPC Pre-trip/Tripstart Default State On 0-on, 1-off
CnF64 Evaporator Fan Pulsing Logic Enable In 0-in, 1-out
Note: Configuration numbers not listed are not used in this application. These items may appear when loading
configuration software to the controller but changes will not be recognized by the controller programming.
4.10 Controller Function Codes

Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code # Title Description
Note: If the function is not applicable, the display will read “-----”
Display Only Functions − Cd01 through Cd26 are display only functions.
Cd01 Suction Modulation Displays the SMV percent open. The right display reads 100% when the valve is fully
Valve (SMV) Opening open and 0% when the valve is fully closed. The valve will usually be at 21% on start
(%) up of the unit except in very high ambient temperatures.
Cd02 Quench Valve State Displays the state of the solenoid quench valve, open or closed.
Cd03 Suction Solenoid Displays the state of the suction solenoid valve, open or closed.
Valve State
Cd04 Line Current, The current sensor measures current on two legs. The third unmeasured leg is calcu-
Phase A lated based on a current algorithm. The current measured is used for control and diag-
nostic purposes.
Cd05 Line Current,
Phase B For control processing, the highest of the Phase A and B current values is used for cur-
rent limiting purposes. For diagnostic processing, the current draws are used to mon-
Cd06 Line Current, itor component energization.
Phase C
Whenever a heater or a motor is turned ON or OFF, the current draw increase/reduc-
tion for that activity is measured. The current draw is then tested to determine if it falls
within the expected range of values for the component.
Failure of this test will result in a pretrip failure or a control alarm indication.
4–25 T-318
Cd07 Main Power Voltage The main supply voltage is displayed.
Cd08 Main Power The value of the main power frequency is displayed in Hertz. The frequency displayed
Frequency will be halved if either fuse F1 or F2 is bad (see alarm code AL21).
Cd09 Ambient Air The Ambient Temperature Sensor reading is displayed.
Temperature
Cd10 Compressor Suction The Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor reading is displayed.
Temperature
Cd11 Compressor The Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor reading is displayed.
Discharge
Temperature
Cd12 Compressor Suction The Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer reading is displayed.
Port Pressure
Cd13 Condenser Pressure The Condenser Pressure Control Sensor reading is displayed.
Control (CPC) Sensor
Cd14 Compressor The Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer reading is displayed.
Discharge Pressure
Cd15 Unloader Valve (On- Not used in this application
Off)
Cd16 Compressor Motor Records total hours of compressor run time. Total hours are recorded in increments of
Hour Meter / Switch 10 hours (i.e., 3000 hours is displayed as 300).
On Time / Press 'Enter' to display Start Switch 'ON' time.
Cd17 Relative Humidity (%) Humidity sensor reading is displayed. This code displays the relative humidity, as a
percent value.
Cd18 Software Revision # The software revision number is displayed.
Cd19 Battery Check This code checks the Controller/DataCORDER battery pack. While the test is running,
“btest” will flash on the right display, followed by the result. PASS will be displayed for
battery voltages greater than 7.0 volts. FAIL will be displayed for battery voltages be-
tween 4.5 and 7.0 volts, and ----- will be displayed for battery voltages less than 4.5
volts. After the result is displayed for four seconds, “btest” will again be displayed, and
the user may continue to scroll through the various codes.
Cd20 Config/Model # This code indicates the dash number of the model for which the Controller is config-
ured (i.e., if the unit is a 69NT40-541-100, the display will show “41100”). To display
controller configuration database information, press ENTER. Values in “CFYYMMDD”
format are displayed if the controller was configured with a configuration card or with
a valid OEM serial port configuration update; “YYMMDD” represents the publication
date of the model configuration database.
Cd21 ML2i - Humidity Water This code displays the status of the humidity water pump (-----, FWD, REV or OFF). If
Pump/Atomizer Status not configured, the mode is permanently deactivated and will display -----.
ML3 - Humidity Water This code displays the status of the humidity water pump (-----, On, or OFF). If not con-
Pump/Air Pump figured, the mode is permanently deactivated and will display -----.
Status
Cd22 Compressor State The status of the compressor is displayed (high, low or off).
Cd23 Evaporator Fan State Displays the current evaporator fan state (high, low or off).
Cd24 Controlled Displays the controlled atmosphere state (-----, On or Off).
Atmosphere State
Cd25 Time Remaining Until This code displays the time remaining until the unit goes into defrost (in tenths of an
Defrost hour). This value is based on the actual accumulated compressor running time.
Cd26 Defrost Temperature Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) reading is displayed.
Sensor Reading
T-318 4–26
Configurable Functions
Configurable Functions − Cd27 through Cd37 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value of
these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd27 Defrost Interval There are two modes for defrost initiation, either user-selected timed intervals or auto-
(Hours or Automatic) matic control. The user-selected values are (OFF), 3, 6, 9, 12, 24 hours, AUTO, or
PuLS. Factory default is 3 hours.
Automatic defrost starts with an initial defrost at three hours and then adjusts the inter-
val to the next defrost based on the accumulation of ice on the evaporator coil. Follow-
ing a startup or after termination of a defrost, the time will not begin counting down until
the defrost temperature sensor (DTS) reading falls below set point. If the reading of
DTS rises above set point any time during the timer count down, the interval is reset
and the countdown begins over.
If the DTS fails, alarm code AL60 is activated and control switches over to the return
temperature sensor. The controller will act in the same manner as with the DTS except
the return temperature sensor reading will be used.
If CnF23 is configured to “SAv” (save), then the value of the defrost interval timer will
be saved at power down and restored at power up. This option prevents short power
interruptions from resetting an almost expired defrost interval, and possibly delaying a
needed defrost cycle.
NOTE
The defrost interval timer counts only during compressor run time.
Configuration variable (CnF11) determines whether the operator will be allowed to
chose “OFF” as a defrost interval option.
Configuration variable (CnF64) determines whether the operator will be allowed to
choose “PuLS” as a defrost interval option. For units operating with “PuLS” selected,
defrost interval is determined by the unit temperature setpoint and the Evaporator Fan
Pulsing Temperature Setting (Cd60). When the unit temperature setpoint is equal to or
less than the Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting, the defrost interval is set
to 6 hours. Otherwise, the defrost interval is determined using the Automatic Defrost
Interval Determination logic. In either case, “PuLS” remains displayed in this function
select code.
After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Interval is used until
the next defrost termination, the next time the DTT contacts are OPEN, or the next time
power to the control is interrupted. If the previous value or the new value is “OFF”, the
newly selected value will be used immediately.
If any Auto Pretrip sequence is initiated, Cd27 will be set to 'AUTO' unless CnF49
(OEM Reset) is set to “Custom” AND CnF64 (Evaporator Fan Pulsing Logic) con figu-
ration variable is set to IN, in which case Cd27 will be set to “PuLS”.
Cd28 Temperature Units This code determines the temperature units (C or F) which will be used for all tem-
(Degrees C or perature displays. The user selects C or F by selecting function code Cd28 and push-
Degrees F) ing the ENTER key. The factory default value is Celsius units. This function code will
display “-----” if CnF34 is set to F.
Cd29 Failure Action Mode This is the desired action to be taken if an alarm occurs that severely limits the capa-
bility of the control system. Depending upon what alarm has occurred, the actual action
taken may not be the same as the desired failure action.
The user selects one of four possible actions as follows:
A - Full Cooling (stepper motor SMV at maximum allowed opening)
B - Partial Cooling (stepper motor SMV 11% open)
C - Evaporator Fan Only
D - Full System Shutdown - Factory Default
4–27 T-318
Cd30 In-Range Tolerance The in-range tolerance will determine the band of temperatures around the set point
which will be designated as in-range.
For normal temperature control, control temperature is considered in range if it is within
setpoint In-Range Tolerance. There are four possible values:
1 = +/- 0.5C (+/-0.9F)
2 = +/- 1.0C (+/-1.8F)
3 = +/- 1.5C (+/-2.7F)
4 = +/- 2.0C (+/-3.6F) - Factory Default
If the control temperature is in-range, the IN-RANGE light will be illuminated.
In-Range tolerance shall be set to +/- 2.0C upon activation of dehumidification or bulb
mode (Cd33, Cd35, Cd48).
When CCPC is actively controlling, IN-RANGE TOLERANCE is not considered.
“-----” will be displayed whenever Dehumidification or Bulb mode is enabled or when
CCPC with six hour re-activation is actively controlling.
“-----” will be displayed whenever Frozen Economy Mode is operating.
Cd31 Stagger Start Offset The stagger start offset time is the amount of time that the unit will delay at start-up,
Time (Seconds) thus allowing multiple units to stagger their control initiation when all units are powered
up together. The eight possible offset values are:
0 (Factory Default), 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 or 21 seconds
Cd32 System Current Limit The current limit is the maximum current draw allowed on any phase at any time. Lim-
(Amperes) iting the unit's current reduces the load on the main power supply. This is accom-
plished by reducing the SMV position until current draw is reduced to the set point.
When desirable, the limit can be lowered; however, capacity is also reduced. The five
values for 460VAC operation are 15, 17, 19, 21 (Factory Default), 23.
Cd33 Humidity Setpoint This is the value in percent to which the system will dehumidify or humidify. There are
configuration variables that determine whether dehumidification/humidification capa-
bilities are installed. In the test mode, the setpoint will be temporarily set to 1%, allow-
ing the test of dehumidification. After 5 minutes, the normal setpoint is restored. If unit
is configured for HUMIDIFICATION MODE then selection of a setpoint greater than
75% will activate humidification, and a setpoint less than or equal to 75% will activate
dehumidification. If the unit is configured for dehumidification only, then the entire set-
point range will apply to dehumidification. If Pretrip is initiated, this value will be set to
“OFF” automatically.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
Cd34 Economy Mode The current state of the economy mode option, “-----”, On, or Off. CnF22 determines
whether economy mode offered. Economy mode is a user selectable mode of opera-
tion provided for power saving purposes.
Cd35 Bulb Mode The current state of the bulb mode option, “-----”, nOr, or bULb.
Bulb mode is an extension of dehumidification control (Cd33). If dehumidification
(CnF04) is set to “Off”, Cd35 will display “Nor” and the user will be unable to change it.
CnF28 determines whether the bulb mode selection is offered.
After a dehumidification set point has been selected and entered for code Cd33, the
user may then change Cd35 to bulb. After Bulb Mode has been selected and entered,
the user may then utilize function codes Cd36 and Cd37 to make the desired changes.
T-318 4–28
Cd36 Evaporator Fan This is the desired evaporator fan speed for use during the bulb Dehumidification and
Speed Select Humidification mode option.
This code is enabled only if in the dehumidification mode (Cd33) and bulb mode
(Cd35) has been set to “bulb”. If these conditions are not met, “alt” will be displayed
(indicating that the evaporator fans will alternate their speed) and the display cannot
be changed.
If a dehumidification set point has been selected along with bulb mode then alt may be
selected for alternating speed, “Lo” for low speed evaporator fan only, or “Hi” for high
speed evaporator fan only.
If a setting other than “alt” has been selected and bulb mode is deactivated in any man-
ner, then selection reverts back to “alt”.
Cd37 Variable DTT Setting This is the Variable Defrost Termination Thermostat (DTT) setting to be used with the
(Bulb Mode) optional bulb mode functionality. This item is only displayed if the bulb mode option is
configured on.
Cd38 Secondary Supply Code Cd38 will display the current supply recorder sensor (SRS) reading for units con-
Temperature Sensor figured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER, Cd38 will display
“-----”. If the DataCORDER suffers a failure (AL55), Cd38 will display the supply re-
corder sensor reading.
Cd39 Secondary Return Code Cd39 will display the current return recorder sensor (RRS) reading for units con-
Temperature Sensor figured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER, Cd39 will display
“-----”. If the DataCORDER suffers a failure (AL55), Cd39 will display the return record-
er sensor reading.
Cd40 Container If a valid container id exists, the default display for cd40 will be “cd40_XXXXX” where
Identification “XXXXX” is the 5th character through the 9th character of the container id. Pressing
Number the Enter key on cd40 will display “id_YYYYYYY” where “YYYYYYY” is the 5th char-
acter to the 11th character of the container id.
If no valid container id exists or the container id is blank, the default display will have
cd40 on the left display and the right display will alternate between “_nEEd” and
“___id”. Pressing the enter key while on cd40 in the state will prompt the Set Id Inter-
face.
On start up if the container id is not valid, cd40 be brought up on the display for the first
minute of power up. This can be left by either entering a container id or leaving the
code select normally.
Code Cd40 is configured at commissioning to read a valid container identification num-
ber. The reading will not display alpha characters; only the numeric portion of the num-
ber will display.
Cd41 Valve Override SERVICE FUNCTION: This code is used for troubleshooting, and allows manual po-
sitioning of the SMV. Refer to Section 7.20 for operating instructions.
Configurable Functions − Cd43 is a user-selectable function. The operator can change the value of this function to
meet the operational needs of the container.
4–29 T-318
Cd43 AutoFresh Mode Cd43 is a user selectable mode of operation that allows opening and closing of a me-
chanical air vent door via a stepper motor. Selection modes are as follows:
OFF - Air makeup vent will remain closed.
USER - Allows for manual selection of the setting.
DELAY - The opening of the door is based on selected time, return temperature and
flow rate (percent opened).
gASLM - The opening is based percent open and CO2 and O2 selectable limits (LM).
This selection is only active if the unit has a CO2 sensor.
TEST / CAL (CO2 sensor option units only) - The door will fully open and close to allow
the user to inspect its operation. If CAL is selected, the controller will zero calibrate the
CO2 sensor input.
If the unit is not configured with AutoFresh, the CD43 will display “----”
Display Only Function − Cd44 is a display only function.
Cd44 eAutoFresh Values / Code Cd44 displays the eAutoFresh CO2 and O2 values (CO2 and O2) and CO2 and
CO2 Sensor Status O2 limits (CO2 LIM and O2 LIM), respectively.
This function code will be dashed out if not configured for eAutofresh.
This function code will be dashed if CO2 sensor is not detected, and a sensor is not
expected (didn't have one previously).
This function code will display ChECK if a CO2 sensor has not been auto-detected at
the most recent power-up and was detected at a previous power-up. If “ChECK” is dis-
played and the ENTER key is pressed, “SEnSr” is displayed with the choices of “YES”
and “no”:
“YES” - sensor should be remembered as detected (present)
“no” - sensor should not be remembered as being detected (not present)
Cd45 Vent Position Sensor Values: 0 to 240 for UPPER / 0 to 225 for LOWER
(VPS) Position This function code will be dashed out if not configured for VPS.
When configured for VPS, Cd45 displays the current vent position in units of 5 CMH
(units displayed as “CM”) or CFM (units displayed as “CF”) depending on the selection
of Cd46 (Airflow display units), Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the pressing of the deg C/F key.
Cd45 will display whenever the control detects movement via the sensor unless AL50
is active. Cd45 will display for 30 seconds, then time out and return to the normal dis-
play mode.
Cd46 Airflow Display Units Selects the airflow units to be displayed by Cd45 if configured for Vent Position Sensor
or displayed by USER/FLO under Cd43 if configured for Autoslide.
CF = Cubic Feet per Minute
CM = Cubic Meters per Hour
bOth = Displays CF or CM depending on the setting of Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the
pressing of the degree C/F key.
Cd47 Variable Economy The variable temperature “degrees C or degrees F” setting is used with economy
Temperature Setting mode. Function code is −−−− when unit is not configured for economy mode.
T-318 4–30
Cd48 Dehumidification / Initially Cd48 will display current dehumidification-mode; bUlb - bulb cargo mode, dE-
Bulb Cargo Mode hUM - normal dehumidification, or OFF - off. This display is steady.
Parameter Selection Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter selec-
tion menus (mode, setpoint, evaporator speed, DTT setting). Pressing ENTER key in
any parameter selection menu commits to selection of the currently displayed param-
eter and causes the interface to descend into the next parameter selection menu. All
parameter selection menus alternate between a blank display and the current selec-
tion in the right hand display.
Pressing CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current selection activity
and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd48 display mode if
that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to normal
system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any previously com-
mitted changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration options
and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Whenever any pretrip test is initiated, dehumidification-mode goes to OFF.
Whenever dehumidification-mode goes to OFF:
• Dehumidification control setpoint goes to 0% RH internally but will then initial-
ize to 95% RH when dehumidification-mode leaves OFF.
• Evaporator speed select goes to Alt for units without PWM Compressor Con-
trol (Cnf57 = Out), Evaporator speed select goes to Hi for units with PWM
Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In).
• DTT setting goes to 25.6°C or 18.0°C, depending on Cnf41.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to bUlb, DTT setting goes to 18.0°C if it had
been set higher.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to dEhUM, DTT setting goes to 25.6°C or
18.0°C, depending on Cnf41.
For units without PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = Out):
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set below 65% RH evaporator
speed select goes to LO if it had been set to Hi.
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set above 64% RH evaporator
speed select goes to Alt if it had been set to LO.
For units with PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In):
• Whenever dehumidification control set point is set below 60% RH, the evapo-
rator fan speed is set to LO, the user has the ability to set the evaporator fan
speed to Hi via the keypad.
• Whenever dehumidification control set point is set equal to or above 60% RH,
the evaporator fan speed is set to Hi, the user has the ability to set the evapo-
rator fan speed to LO via the keypad.
Display Only Function − Cd49 is a display only function.
Cd49 Days Since Last Displays the number of days since last successful pretrip sequence.
Successful Pretrip Press ENTER to view the number of days since the last successful pretrip for Auto1,
Auto2, and Auto2 in sequence.
Press CODE SELECT to step back through the list and ultimately to exit the Cd49 display.
4–31 T-318
Cd50 CCPC “OFF” = disabled.
Enable/Disable “On” = enabled.
“SEtPt” = suspended by setpoint too low.
“CAHUM” = suspended by CA or humidity control.
“ACt” = suspended by ACT active.
“FAIL” = all return temperature probe failure for CCPC.
“PrtrP” = pretrip active.
“C LIM” = suspended by cool limit logic.
“PULL” = pulldown active.
“ALArM” = suspended by shutdown alarm
Press enter, arrow keys, and then enter to select “OFF” or “On”.
If “On” is selected, CCPC operation may be suspended as indicated by one of the sus-
pension codes listed above. If CCPC is not “OFF” and is not suspended, “On” will be
displayed.
Cd51 Automatic Cold ACT-mode:
Treatment (ACT) Cd51 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0”
Mode Parameter
Selection “done” mm-dd this will be display is ACT has completed
“ACt” value On OFF or “----”Display /Select: default “OFF”
“trEAt” value °C / °F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default “0.0°C”
“DAyS” value “0-99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “0”
“ProbE” value Probe positions ex '1 2 _ 4' '1 _ 3 _' Display: default “---- “
“SPnEW” value °C / °F on 0.1 increments Display/Select: default “10.0°C”
Initially Cd51 will display current countdown timer increments of (1 day)_(1hr), de fault
“0_0”
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter selec-
tion menus in the order listed above. Pressing ENTER key in any of the parameter se-
lection menus commits to selection of the currently displayed parameter and causes
the interface to descend into the next parameter selection menu. All parameter selec-
tion menus alternate between a blank display and the current selection in the right
hand display.
and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd51 dis play mode if
Parameter with the exception of “Act” may not be altered if Cd51 is re-entered if “Act”
is “On”. When ACT has completed including reaching the new setpoint “done” on the
left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right display will be displayed
as the second entry in the menu. Turning ACT off clears this entry. This action also
resets Cd51 to initial time remaining. ACT must then be turned on to view or modify the
additional parameters.
Whenever any auto pretrip test or Trip Start is initiated, act-mode goes to OFF.
T-318 4–32
Cd53 Automatic Set point ASC-mode:
Change (ASC) Mode Cd53 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0”
Parameter Selection
“done” mm-dd this will be display is ASC has completed
“ASC” value “On” “OFF” Display /Select: default “OFF”
“nSC” value “1 - 6” (This is the value “n” for the subsequent entries).
“SP (n-1)” value °C/°F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default “10.0°C”
“DAY (n-1)” value “1-99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “1”
“SP” (n) value °C/°F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default “10.0°C”
Initially displays current count down timer increments of (1 day)(1hr), default “0_0”
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter selec-
tion menus in the order listed above. Pressing ENTER key in any of the parameter se-
lection menus selects the currently displayed parameter and causes the interface to
descend into the next parameter selection menu. All parameter selection menus alter-
nate between a blank display and the current selection in the right hand display.
and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd53 dis play mode if
Parameter with the exception of “ASC” may not be altered if Cd53 is re-entered if
“ASC” is “On”. When ASC has completed including reaching the last setpoint “done”
on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right display will be dis-
played as the second entry in the menu. Turning ASC off clears this entry. This action
also resets Cd53 to initial time remaining. ASC must then be turned on to view or mod-
ify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto Pretrip test or Trip Start is initiated, ASC mode goes to OFF.
Cd55 Discharge Superheat Cd55 will display the discharge superheat values in °C / °F as calculated by the dis-
charge temperature minus the discharge saturation temperature as calculated from
discharge pressure. “-----” will be displayed if selection is not valid.
Cd58 Water Pressure Cd58 will display “CLOSE” if the WPS or CFS switch contacts are closed or if these
Switch / Condenser options are not installed. “OPEn” is displayed when the WPS or CFS switch contacts
Fan Switch State are open. When the WPS/CFS Override Logic is “TRUE”, the right display will flash on
Override Logic State all units.
1. This CLOSE/OPEn state displayed in this Code Select function only applies to
units that have the ability to detect the state of a WPS/CFS. This function
should not be relied upon to display the condition of the switch on units that
don’t have a WPS/CFS switch connected to ECG2 exclusively.
2. The right display will flash if the WPS/CFS Override Logic is TRUE on all units.
This is always the case, whether the unit has a WPS or CFS installed or not.
3. The ability of the WPS/CFS Override Logic to control the condenser fan is lim-
ited. It is not possible for this logic to control the fan on units that have the
WPS or CFS wired in series with the fan contactor. Units wired in this configu-
ration can indicate that the WPS/CFS Override Logic is active by flashing the
right display, however, the wiring will not allow for control of the condenser fan.
Configurable Functions − Cd60 is a user-selectable function. The operator can change the value of this function to
meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd60 Evaporator Fan Cd60 contains a selectable temperature range used to determine the engagement
Pulsing Temperature point of the Evaporator Fan Pulsing logic. Default setting is -18.1°C. The user may
Setting change the temperature by pressing enter, then scrolling to the desired temperature
using either arrow key. Press Enter to accept the change. The temperature setting will
be retained until either a Pretrip or Trip Start is initiated at which time the temperature
will set to the default setting.
4–33 T-318
Figure 4.13 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence
Start
Troubleshooting
Unit does No Check Power Refer to CONNECT POWER

self test? Supply Section 5.2
Yes
Did
Evaporator No Check Power Refer to CONNECT POWER
fans start? Supply Section 5.2
Yes
Correct No Install Latest Refer to CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

software Software Section 4.2
version? Revision
Yes
Unit Load correct

configured No Refer to Configuration Software
unit (CnF Variables), refer to Table 4–4
correctly? configuration
Yes
See alarm
Active Yes details & Refer to Controller Alarm Indications
Alarms? repair Table 4–6
No
Pass No Refer to Pre−trip Diagnostics

Pre −trip Correct
inspection? all faults Section 4.7
Yes
Operating No Correct Refer to Refrigeration System

pressures Refrigerant Service Section 7.2 – 7.7
normal? issue
Yes
Unit OK
T-318 4–34
4.11 Controller Alarm Indications
Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Indications
Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions
AL05 Controller has detected Keypad Power cycle the unit. Resetting the unit may
Manual Defrost continuous Manual De- correct problem, monitor
Switch Failure frost Switch activity for the unit.
five minutes or more. If the alarm reappears
after 5 minutes replace
the keypad.
AL06 Controller has detected Keypad or Power cycle the unit. Resetting the unit may
Keypad or one of the keypad keys Harness correct problem, monitor
Keypad Harness is continuously activity. the unit.
Fail If the alarm reappears
replace the keypad and
harness.
AL07 The VPS is reading Vent Position Manually reposition vent If unable to obtain zero
Fresh Air Vent greater than 0 CMH Sensor (VPS) and confirm using Cd45. reading, replace defec-
Open while unit is in frozen Refer to VENT POSI- tive VPS.
mode or XtendFRESH TION SENSOR SER-
active. VICE Section 7.25.
AL10 Alarm 10 is triggered This is a display Refer to eAutoFresh The alarm is triggered off
CO2 Sensor when the CO2 sensor alarm and has no manual. when voltage is within
Failure voltage is operating associated failure operating range.
outside of the 0.9 v to action.
4.7 v range, or if the
sensor is out of range.
AL11 Alarm 11 is triggered Evaporator Fan 1 The unit will suspend AL11 is triggered off
Evaporator fan 1 when configured for probe check diagnostic when MC6 sensed low.
IP single evap operation logic and disable the
and MC6 sensed high. probe check portion of
defrost cycle.
AL12 Alarm 12 is triggered Evaporator Fan 2 The unit will suspend AL12 is triggered off
Evaporator when configured for probe check diagnostic when KB10 sensed low.
fan 2 IP single evap operation logic and disable the
and KB10 sensed high. probe check portion of
defrost cycle.
AL15 Unit fails to achieve N/A Power cycle the unit. Resetting the unit may
Loss of cooling 0.25°C temperature correct problem, monitor
delta for eight minutes the unit.
before a probe-check
defrost and then fails
again for thirty minutes
after the probe-check.
AL20 Control power fuse Check F3A, if the Check PA, PB, CH coils Replace the defective
Control (F3A or F3B) is open. fuse is open: for short to ground, if coil.
Contactor Fuse short is found: Replace the fuse.
(F3) Check F3B, if the Check CF, ES, EF, HR Replace the defective
fuse is open: coils for short to ground, coil.
if short is found, coil is Replace the fuse.
defective.
Check Voltage at If voltage is present, it in- Refer to Controller Ser-
QC1: dicates a defective mi- vice Section 7.23.
croprocessor.
4–35 T-318
AL21 One of the 18 VAC System Sensors Check system sensors Replace defective
Control Circuit controller fuses (F1/F2) for short to ground. sensor(s).
Fuse (F1/F2) is open. Refer to Cd08. Wiring Check wiring for short to Repair as needed.
ground.
Controller Controller may have an Replace controller, refer
internal short. to Controller Service
Section 7.23.
AL22 Evaporator motor Evaporator Motor Shut down unit, discon- Replace defective evapo-
Evaporator IP internal protector (IP) is nect power, & check rator fan motor, refer to
open. Evaporator Motor IP at EVAPORATOR FAN
plug connection pins 4 & MOTOR Service Section
6. 7.16.
AL23 Controller fails to Incoming Power Check incoming power Correct power source as
Loss of Phase B detect current draw. source. required.
AL24 Compressor internal Compressor Shut down unit discon- Monitor unit, if alarm re-
Compressor IP protector (IP) is open. nect power, & check remains active or is repeti-
sistance of compressor tive replace the
windings at contactor compressor at the next
T1-T2, T2-T3. available opportunity, re-
fer to COMPRESSOR
Service Section 7.8.
AL25 Condenser fan motor Insufficient Shut down unit and Remove obstructions.
Condenser IP internal protector (IP) is Air Flow check condenser fan for
open. obstructions.
Condenser Shut down unit, discon- Replace defective con-
Fan Motor nect power, & check denser fan motor, refer
Condenser Fan Motor IP to Condenser Fan Motor
at plug connection pins 1 Assembly Service
& 2. Section 7.11.
AL26 Sensors out of range. All sensors de- Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
All Sensors tected as out of action is required.
Failure: range If P5 fails, replace the de-
Supply/Return fective sensor as deter-
Probes mined by P5, refer to
TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR Service Section
7.24.
AL27 Controller AD Controller Power cycle the unit. If Replace defective micro-
Analog to Digital converter faulty. the alarm persists, it indi- processor, refer to Con-
Accuracy cates a defective micro- troller Service Section
Failure processor. 7.23.
AL29 Alarm 29 is triggered if Alarm LED will be Refer to eAutoFresh The alarm is triggered off
AutoFresh CO2 or O2 level is out- activated and user manual. when atmospheric con-
Failure side of the limit range intervention is re- ditions are within limit
and the vent position is quired. settings.
at 100% for longer than
90 minutes.
AL50 VPS Sensor out of Vent Position Make sure VPS is Manually tighten panel.
Air Vent Position range. Sensor (VPS) secure.
Sensor (VPS) If the alarm persists, Replace VPS.
replace the sensor or the
assembly.
T-318 4–36
AL51 Controller Memory Controller Pressing the ENTER key If action is successful (all
EEPROM Failure when “CLEAr” is dis- alarms are inactive),
Failure played will result in an at- alarm 51 will be reset.
tempt to clear the alarm.
Power cycle the unit. If Replace defective con-
the alarm persists, it indi- troller, refer to Controller
cates defective controller Service Section 7.23.
memory.
AL52 Alarm list queue is full Active Alarms Repair any alarms in the Clear alarms, refer to
EEPROM Alarm queue that are active. In- CONTROLLER
List Full dicated by “AA”. ALARMS Table 4–6.
AL53 Battery voltage low Battery If this alarm occurs on To clear the alarm press
Battery start up, allow a unit fit- ENTER and ALT simul-
Pack Failure ted with rechargeable taneously at the startup
batteries to operate for of Cd19 (Battery Check).
up to 24 hours to charge
rechargeable batteries If alarm persists, replace
sufficiently. Once fully the battery pack, refer to
charged, the alarm will Section 7.23.5 Battery
deactivate. Replacement.
AL54 Invalid Supply Supply Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
Primary Supply Temperature Sensor Temperature action is required.
Sensor (STS) (STS) reading. Sensor (STS) If P5 fails, replace the de-
fective sensor as deter-
mined by P5, refer to
TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR Service Section
7.24.
AL56 Invalid Return Return Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
Primary Return Temperature Sensor Temperature action is required.
Sensor (RTS) (RTS) reading. Sensor (RTS) If P5 fails, replace the de-
fective sensor as deter-
TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR Service Section
7.24.
AL57 Invalid Ambient Tem- Ambient Tem- Test the AMBS, refer to Replace AMBS if defec-
Ambient Sensor perature Sensor perature Sensor TEMPERATURE SEN- tive, refer to TEMPERA-
(AMBS) (AMBS) reading. (AMBS) SOR Service Section TURE SENSOR Service
7.24. Section 7.24.
AL58 High pressure safety High Pressure Test the HPS; refer to Replace HPS if defec-
Compressor switch remains open Switch (HPS) Checking High Pressure tive, refer to High Pres-
High Pressure for at least one minute. Switch, Section 7.9.1. sure Switch, Section
Safety (HPS) 7.9.
Refrigeration Sys- Check unit for air flow re- Clean or remove any de-
tem strictions. bris from coils.
AL59 Heat Termination Ther- Alarm 59 is trig- Check for 24 volts at test Replace HTT
Heater Termina- mostat (HTT) is open. gered by the open- point TP10, if no voltage if defective.
tion Thermostat ing of the Heat at TP10 after unit has
(HTT) Termination Ther- reached set point HTT is
mostat (HTT) and open.
will result in the
disabling of the
heater.
4–37 T-318
AL60 Failure of the Defrost Defrost Tempera- Test the DTS; refer to Replace the DTS if de-
Defrost Temperature Sensor ture Sensor (DTS) Sensor Checkout Proce- fective, refer to Sensor
Temperature (DTS) to open. dure Section 7.24.1. Replacement Section
Sensor (DTS) 7.24.2.
AL61 Improper current draw Heater(s) While in heat or defrost Replace heater(s) if de-
Heater Current during heat or defrost mode, check for proper fective, refer to Section
Draw Fault mode. current draw at heater 7.15.2 Evaporator Heat-
contactors, refer to er Removal and Re-
ELECTRICAL DATA placement.
Section 3.3.
Contactor Check voltage at heater Replace heater contac-
contactor on the heater tor if defective.
side. If no voltage pres-
ent:
AL63 Unit operating above Refrigeration Check unit for air flow re- Clean or remove any de-
Current Limit current limit. System strictions. bris from coils.
Check unit for proper op- Repair as needed.
eration.
Power supply Confirm supply voltage/ Correct power supply.
frequency is within spec-
ification and balanced
according to ELECTRI-
CAL DATA Section 3.3.
Current limit set Check current limit set- The current limit can be
too low ting Code Cd32. raised (maximum of 23
amps) using Cd32.
AL64 Discharge Tempera- Discharge Test the CPDS; refer to Replace the CPDS if de-
Discharge ture sensor out of temperature Sensor Checkout Proce- fective, refer to Sensor
Temperature range. sensor (CPDS). dure, Section 7.24.1. Replacement Section
Sensor (CPDS) 7.24.
AL65 Compressor Discharge Compressor Confirm accurate DPT Replace DPT if
Discharge Pres- Transducer Discharge pressure readings, refer defective.
sure Transducer is out of range. Transducer (DPT) to MANIFOLD GAUGE
(DPT) SET Section 7.2.
AL66 Suction Pressure Suction Pressure Confirm accurate EPT Replace EPT/SPT if de-
(SPT) Suction Transducer (SPT) out Transducer (SPT) and SPT pressure read- fective.
Pressure Trans- of range. ings, refer to MANIFOLD
ducer, GAUGE SET Section
(EPT) 7.2.
Evaporator - Performing a Pre-trip 5-
Pressure 9 test will also check the
Transducer transducers.
Monitor If the alarm persists, it
may indicate a failing
compressor, refer to
COMPRESSOR
Service Section 7.8.
AL67 Humidity Sensor (HS) Humidity Sensor Make sure the humidity Monitor, replace HS if
Humidity Sensor reading out of range. (HS) sensor is properly con- alarm persists.
nected in the socket and
the wires have not been
damaged.
T-318 4–38
AL68 Condenser Pressure Condenser Pres- NA Unit will disable Con-
CPC Pressure Transducer (CPC) out sure Transducer denser Pressure Control
Sensor (PS3) of range. (CPC) if Configured.
AL69 Suction Temperature Suction Test the CPSS, refer to Replace CPSS if defec-
Suction Temp Sensor (CPSS) out of Temperature TEMPERATURE SEN- tive, refer to TEMPERA-
Sensor (CPSS) range. Sensor (CPSS) SOR Service Section TURE SENSOR Service
7.24 Section 7.24.
AL70 Secondary Supply Secondary Sup- Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
Secondary Sensor (SRS) is out of ply Sensor (SRS) action is required.
Supply Sensor range. If P5 fails, replace the de-
(SRS) fective sensor as deter-
TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR Service Section
7.24.
AL71 Secondary Return Secondary Return Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
Secondary Sensor (RRS) is out of Sensor (RRS) action is required.
Return Sensor range. If P5 fails, replace the de-
(RRS) fective sensor as deter-
TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR Service Section
7.24.
AL72 After the unit goes in- Refrigeration Ensure unit is operating Power cycle unit.
Control Temp range for 30 minutes System correctly. Control Temperature is
Out of Range then out of range for a in In-range.
continuous 120 min- Any Pre-trip mode, re-
utes. sets the timers.
NOTE
If the controller is configured for four probes without a DataCORDER, the DataCORDER alarms
AL70 and AL71 will be processed as Controller alarms AL70 and AL71. Refer to Table 4–10.
4–39 T-318
ERR # Internal The controller performs self-check routines. If an internal failure occurs,
Microprocessor an “ERR” alarm will appear on the display. This is an indication the con-
Failure troller needs to be replaced.
ERROR DESCRIPTION
ERR 0-RAM fail- Indicates that the controller working memory has
ure failed.
ERR 1-Program Indicates a problem with the controller program.
Memory failure
ERR 2-Watchdog The controller program has entered a mode where-
time-out by the controller program has stopped executing.
ERR 3-N/A N/A
ERR 4-N/A N/A
ERR 5-A-D failure The controller’s Analog to Digital (A-D) converter
has failed.
ERR 6-IO Board Internal program/update failure.
failure
ERR 7-Controller Internal version/firmware incompatible.
failure
ERR 8-Data- Internal DataCORDER memory failure.
CORDER failure
ERR 9-Controller Internal controller memory failure.
failure
In the event that a failure occurs and the display cannot be updated, the
status LED will indicate the appropriate ERR code using Morse code as
shown below.
Entr Enter Set point (Press

The controller is prompting the operator to enter a set point.
StPt Arrow & Enter)
LO Low Main Voltage
(Function Codes Cd27- This message will be alternately displayed with the set point whenever
38 disabled and NO the supply voltage is less than 75% of its proper value.
alarm stored.)
T-318 4–40
4.12 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes
Table 4–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes
NOTE
“Auto” or “Auto1” menu includes the: P, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6 and rSLts. “Auto2” menu includes P,
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10 and rSLts. “Auto3” menu includes P, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6,
P7, P8 and rSLts.
P0-0 PreTrip Initiated: Container identifier code, Cd18 Software Revision Number, Cd20 Container Unit
Configuration Model Number, & configuration database identifier CFMMYYDD are displayed in
Display, Indicator sequence.
Lamps, LEDs, and Next the unit will indicate the presence or non-presence of an RMU according to
Displays whether any RMU inquiry messages have been received since the unit was booted.
Units equipped with Autoslide Enabled (Cnf44) will cause the vent to seek to its
closed position, followed by two sequences of opening to 100% and returning to
the closed position. No other Autoslide mode of operation will be available until the
two cycles of opening and closing have completed.
Since the system cannot recognize lights and display failures, there are no test
codes or results associated with this phase of Pretrip. To know if the test passes
the operator must observe that the LCD display elements and the indicator lights
behave as described below.
P1 Tests - Heaters Current Draw: Heater is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified range.
No other system components will change state during this test.
P1-0 Heaters On Test Heater starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and then the heater
is turned on. After 15 seconds, the current draw is measured again. The change
in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if the change in current draw test is in the range specified.
P1-1 Heaters Off Test Heater is then turned off. After 10 seconds the current draw is measured. The
change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw is in the range specified.
P2 Tests - Condenser Fan Current Draw: Condenser fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within
specified range. No other system components will change state during this test. If the Water Pressure Switch is
open this test will be skipped.
P2-0 Condenser Fan On Condenser fan starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and con dens-
Test er fan is then turned on. After 15 seconds the current draw is measured again. The
change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P2-1 Condenser Fan Off Condenser fan is then turned off. After 10 seconds the current draw is measured.
Test The change in current draw is then recorded.
P3 Tests - Low Speed Evaporator Fan Current Draw: The system must be equipped with a low speed evapo-
rator fan, as determined by CnF02, the Evaporator Fan Speed Select configuration variable. Low speed evapo-
rator fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified range. No other system components will
change state during this test.
NOTE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the start of
either test, then the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the test, then the
test will fail upon conclusion of the test.
P3-0 Low Speed High speed evaporator fans will be turned on for 20 seconds, the fans will be
Evaporator Fans On turned off for 4 seconds, current draw is measured, and then the low speed evap-
Test orator fans are turned on. After 60 seconds the current draw is measured again.
The change in current draw is then recorded.
4–41 T-318
P3-1 Low Speed Low speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the current draw
Evaporator Fan Off is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P4 Tests - High Speed Evaporator Fans Current Draw: High speed evaporator fans are turned on, then off.
Current draw must fall within specified range and measured current changes must exceed specified ratios. No
other system components will change state during this test.
NOTE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the start of
either test, the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the test, the test will
fail upon conclusion of the test.
P4-0 High Speed Evaporator fans start in the off condition, current draw is measured, then high
Evaporator Fan speed evaporator fans will be turned on. After 60 seconds the current draw is
Motors On measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw in the specified range AND measured cur
rent changes exceed specified ratios.
If the three phase motors are configured IN, the change ratio test is skipped.
P4-1 High Speed High speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the current draw
Evaporator Fan is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Motors Off Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P5 Tests - Air Stream Temperature Sensor Tests: Tests the validity of the Air Stream Temperature Sensors.
P5-0 Supply / Return The High Speed Evaporator Fan is turned on and run for eight minutes, with all
Probe Test other outputs de-energized. A temperature comparison is made between the re-
turn and supply probes.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.
NOTE
If this test fails, “P5-0” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe tests (this test
and the PRIMARY / SECONDARY) pass, the display will read “P5” “PASS”.
P5-1 Supply Probe Test This test if for units equipped with secondary supply probe only.
The temperature difference between primary supply probe and secondary supply
probe is compared.
NOTE
If this test fails, “P5-1” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe tests (this and
the SUPPLY / RETURN TEST) pass, because of the multiple tests, the display
will read “P5” “PASS”.
P5-2 Return Probe Test For units equipped with secondary return probe only.
The temperature difference between primary return probe and secondary return
probe is compared.
NOTES
1. If this test fails, “P5-2” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe tests
(this test and the SUPPLY / RETURN) pass, because of the multiple tests,
the display will read “P5”, “PASS”.
2. The results of PreTrip tests 5-0, 5-1 and 5-2 will be used to activate or
clear control probe alarms.
P5-3 − P5-9 Not Applicable
T-318 4–42
P5-10 Humidity Sensor This is a Pass/Fail/Skip test of the humidity sensor configuration.
Controller Test passes if the controller configuration has humidity sensor in.
Configuration
Verification Test Test fails if the controller configuration has humidity sensor out and Vout is greater
than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test is skipped if the controller configuration has the humidity sensor out and Vout
is less than 0.20 Volts. Unit must be configured with a Humidity Sensor for this test
is run.
P5-11 Humidity Sensor This is a Pass/Fail test of humidity sensor installation (sensor is present).
Installation Test passes if Vout is greater than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Verification Test
Test fails if Vout is less than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test P5-10 must pass before this test is run.
P5-12 Humidity Sensor This is a Pass/Fail test of the Humidity Sensor Range.
Range Check Test Test passes if Vout for the humidity sensor is between 0.33 Volts and 4 Volts.
Test fails if Vout is outside of this range.
Test P5-11 must pass before this test is run.
P6 Tests - Compressor and Refrigerant Valves: This section of testing deals with the Compressor and the two
Compressor valves: Suction Modulation Valve and Quench Valve.
P6-0 Compressor On A current draw test is performed before the compressor is started. The compres-
sor is started, the SMV is opened, and another current draw test is performed.
Test Passes if the change in compressor current draw is within the specified range.
P6-1, Not Applicable These tests are not run for Single Speed Compressors.
P6-H,
P6-L
P6-2 Suction Modulation The compressor and fans continue to run from the previous test. The quench
Valve (Open and valve (if configured) will operate as in normal control mode. The SMV is closed to
Closed) 0% open, current and condenser pressure readings are taken. The SMV is
opened to 50% with continuous current and condenser pressure readings taken
to establish maximum values. The SMV is returned to 0% open and final readings
are taken.
Test passes if the calculated difference in current at the 50% open position are
above a specified value before and after opening of the SMV, OR the calculated
difference in condenser pressure at the 50% open position are above a specified
value before and after opening of the SMV.
P6-3 Quench Valve Test To run this test, the system must be equipped with a solenoid quench valve as de-
termined by CnF12, (TXV/Solenoid Quench Valve), and ambient temperature
must be greater than -12C.
Compressor suction temperature is measured with the Quench valve closed, the
Quench valve is energized and the suction temperature drop is checked.
Test passes if suction temperature is within the valid range.
P6-4 Not Applicable This test is not run for units configured with a stepper type SMV.
P6-5 Not Applicable This test is not run, units with stepper type SMVs are not configured with a by pass
valve.
P6-6 Not Applicable This test is only run on systems that have an Unloader as indicated by CnF13 (Un-
loader).
NOTE
P7-0 & P8 are included with the “Auto2” & “Auto 3” only. P9-0 through P10 are included with “Auto2”
only.
4–43 T-318
P7 Tests - High Pressure Tests: Unit is run at full capacity without condenser fan running to make sure that the
HPS opens and closes properly.
P7-0 High Pressure With the unit running, the condenser fan is de-energized, and a 15 minute timer is
started. The right display shows discharge pressure if the unit is equipped with a
Switch Closed
discharge pressure transducer (DPT). If no DPT is installed, the condenser pres-
sure transducer (CPT) reading will be displayed.
Test is skipped if:
Sensed ambient temperature is less than 7C (45F)
Return air temperature is less than -17.8C (0F)
The water pressure switch (WP) is open, indicating that the unit is oper-
ating with a water-cooled condenser
Test is skipped if the unit does NOT have:
A compressor discharge sensor (CPDS)
A discharge pressure transducer (DPT)
A condenser pressure transducer (CPT)
Test passes if the HPS opens within 15 minutes.
Test immediately fails if the following inputs are sensed to be invalid:
Compressor discharge sensor (CPDS)
Discharge pressure transducer (DPT)
Condenser pressure transducer (CPT)
Return temperature sensor (RTS)
Ambient sensor (AMBS)
Test will also fail if:
HPS fails to open within 15 minutes
Discharge temperature exceeds 138C (280F)
Discharge temperature is less than or equal to ambient temperature plus
5C (9F)
CPT or DPT pressure exceeds 27.42kg/cm2 (390psig)
P7-1 High Pressure Test P7-0 must pass for P7-1 to execute.
Switch Open The condenser fan is started and a 60 second timer is started.
Test passes if the high pressure switch (HPS) closes within the 60-second time
limit, otherwise, it fails.
P8 Tests - Perishable Mode Tests: Pretrip tests P7-0 and P7-1 must have passed or have been skipped for
these tests to execute.
P8-0 Perishable Mode If the container temperature is below 15.6C (60F), the set point is changed to
Heat Test 15.6C, and a 60-minute timer is started. The left display will read “P8-0”. The con-
trol will then heat the container until 15.6C is reached.
If the container temperature is above 15.6C at the start of the test, then the test
proceeds immediately to test P8-1 and the left display will change to “P8-1”.
The test fails if the 180-minute timer expires before the control temperature reach-
es set point. The display will read “P8-0”, “FAIL”.
T-318 4–44
P8-1 Perishable Mode Control temperature must be at least 15.6C (60F).
Pull Down Test / The set point is changed to 0C (32F), and a 180-minute timer is started. The left
eAutofresh CO2 display will read “P8-1”, the right display will show the supply air temperature. The
Sensor Calibration unit will then start to pull down the temperature to the 0C set point.
The test passes if the container temperature reaches set point before the 180-min-
ute timer expires.
On units where the CO2 Sensor Status indicates that a CO2 sensor is present, cali-
bration of the CO2 sensor will be attempted during P8-1. Once P8-1 begins, calibra-
tion will be attempted when the supply temperature goes below 5C. If the CO2
sensor voltage reads within the 0.95 <>1.15Vdc range before the end of P8-1, the
sensor will be calibrated by holding the CO2 zero line low for 4 seconds. Once cali-
bration is performed, the sensor voltage will be verified to make sure it is in the 0.95
to 1.05 Vdc range. If the voltage is not within this range, CO2 sensor calibration fails.
P8-2 Perishable Mode Test P8-1 must pass for P8-2 to execute.
Maintain A fifteen minute timer is started, and the system will attempt to minimize control
Temperature Test temperature error (supply temperature minus setpoint) until the timer expires. The
control temperature will be sampled each minute starting at the beginning of P8-2.
During P8-2, the left display will read “P8-2”, and the right display will show the
supply air temperature.
When the test is completed, the average control temperature error will be com-
pared to the pass/fail criteria.
Test passes if the average temperature error is within +/- 1.0C.
Test fails if the average temperature error is greater than +/- 1.0C, or if the Data-
Corder supply temperature probe is invalid. If the test fails, the control probe tem-
perature will be recorded as -50.0C.
P9 Test - DTT Close and Open Test: The DTT in this control is not a physical device, with actual metallic con
tacts, it is a software function that acts similar to a thermostat. Using various temperature inputs, the DTT function
determines whether a thermostat mounted on the Evaporator Coil would have OPEN or CLOSED contacts. Pri-
marily, the DTT function operates based on the temperature reading from the Defrost Termination Sensor.
P9-0 DTT Closed and During P9-0 the defrost temperature sensor (DTS) reading will be displayed on the
Open Test left display. The right display will show the supply air temperature.
The unit will run FULL COOL for 30 minutes maximum until the DTT is considered
closed. Once the DTT is considered closed, the unit simulates defrost by running
the heaters for up to two hours, or until the DTT is considered open.
Test fails if:
The DTT is not considered closed after the 30 minutes of full cooling.
HTT opens when DTT is considered closed or if return air temperature
rises above 248C (120F).
Test passes if the DTT is considered open within the 2 hour heat cycle time limit.
4–45 T-318
P10 Tests - Frozen Mode Tests:
P10-0 Frozen Mode Setup After completion of the Defrost Test, if the container temperature is below 7.2C,
Test the setpoint is changed to 7.2C, and a 180 minute timer is started. The control
will then be placed in the equivalent of normal heating.
If the container temperature is above 7.2C at the start of the test, then the test
proceeds immediately to test P10-1.
During P10, the control temperature will be shown on the right display.
Test fails if the 180 minute timer expires before the control temperature reaches
setpoint -0.3C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat.
There is no pass display for this test. Once the control temperature reaches set
point, the test proceeds to test 10-1.
P10-1 Frozen Mode When the container temperature is greater than or equal to the 7.2C (45F) set
Pulldown Test point which was set in the frozen mode heat test, the left display will read “P10-1”
and the right display will show the return air temperature. The set point will then
be changed to -17.7C (0F). The unit will then have a maximum of three hours to
pull the container temperature down to the -17.7C set point.
If this occurs within the three hour time limit, the test passes. If pulldown is not
completed within the three hour time, the test fails.
Upon failure and when initiated by an automatic Pretrip sequence, P10-1 will auto-
repeat by starting P10-0 over again.
P10-2 Frozen Mode Test P10-1 must pass for P10-2 to execute.
Maintain A fifteen minute timer is started, and the system will attempt to minimize control
Temperature Test temperature error (return temperature minus setpoint) until the timer expires. The
control temperature will be sampled each minute starting at the beginning of P10-2.
During P10-1, the left display will read “P10-2” and the right display will show re-
turn air temperature.
When the test is completed, the average control temperature error will be com
pared to the pass/fail criteria.
Test passes if the average temperature error is within +/-1.6C.
Test fails if the average temperature error is greater than +/-1.6C, or if the Data-
CORDER supply temperature probe is invalid. If the test fails, the control probe
temperature will be recorded as -50.0C.
Upon failure and when initiated by an automatic Pretrip sequence, P10-2 will auto-
repeat by starting P10-0 over again.
T-318 4–46
Table 4–8 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments
NOTE
Inapplicable Functions Display “-----”
To Access: Press ALT. MODE key then CODE SELECT key
dC1 Recorder Supply Current reading of the supply recorder sensor.
Temperature
dC2 Recorder Return Current reading of the return recorder sensor.
Temperature
dC3-5 USDA 1,2,3 Temperatures Current readings of the three USDA probes.
dC6-13 Network Data Points 1-8 Current values of the network data points (as configured). Data point 1
(Code 6) is generally the humidity sensor and its value is obtained from
the Controller once every minute.
dC14 Cargo Probe 4 Current reading of the cargo probe #4.
Temperature
dC15-19 Future Expansion These codes are for future expansion, and are not in use at this time.
dC20-24 Temperature Sensors 1-5 Current calibration offset values for each of the five probes: supply, re-
Calibration turn, USDA #1, #2, and #3. These values are entered via the interroga-
tion program.
dC25 Future Expansion This code is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
dC26,27 S/N, Left 4, Right 4 The DataCORDER serial number consists of eight characters. Function
code dC26 contains the first four characters. Function code dC27 con-
tains the last four characters. (This serial number is the same as the
Controller serial number)
dC28 Minimum Days Left An approximation of the number of logging days remaining until the
Data CORDER starts to overwrite the existing data.
dC29 Days Stored Number of days of data that are currently stored in the DataCORDER.
dC30 Date of last Trip start The date when a Trip Start was initiated by the user. In addition, if the
system goes without power for seven continuous days or longer, a trip
start will automatically be generated on the next AC power up.
dC31 Battery Test Shows the current status of the optional battery pack.
PASS: Battery pack is fully charged.
FAIL: Battery pack voltage is low.
dC32 Time: Hour, Minute Current time on the real-time clock (RTC) in the DataCORDER.
dC33 Date: Month, Day Current date (month and day) on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC34 Date: Year Current year on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC35 Cargo Probe 4 Calibration Current calibration value for the Cargo Probe. This value is an input via
the interrogation program.
4–47 T-318
Table 4–9 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records
Test # Title Data
1-0 Heater On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
1-1 Heater Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-0 Condenser Fan On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Water pressure switch (WPS) - Open/
Closed, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-1 Condenser Fan Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3-0 Low Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3-1 Low Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
4-0 High Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
4-1 High Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
5-0 Supply/Return Probe Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, RTS, SRS and RRS
5-1 Secondary Supply Probe Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result
5-2 Secondary Return Probe Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result
6-0 Compressor On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
6-1 Not Applicable Not Used
6-2 Suction Modulation Valve Open Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Is current or pressure limit in effect (Y,N)
and Closed
7-0 High Pressure Switch Closed Pass/Fail/Skip Result, AMBS, DPT or CPT (if equipped)
Input values that component opens
7-1 High Pressure Switch Open Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, DPT or CPT (if equipped)
Input values that component closes
8-0 Perishable Heat Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time it takes to heat to 16C (60F)
8-1 Perishable Pull Down Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time it takes to pull down to 0C (32F)
8-2 Perishable Maintain Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER supply tempera-
ture (SRS) over last recording interval.
9-0 Defrost Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, DTS reading at end of test, line voltage, line
frequency, time in defrost.
10-0 Frozen Mode Setup Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time unit is in heat.
10-1 Frozen Mode Pull Down Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time to pull down unit to -17.8C (0F).
10-2 Frozen Mode Maintain Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER return temperature
(RRS) over last recording interval.
T-318 4–48
Table 4–10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications
To Access: Press ALT. MODE key then ALARM LIST key
dAL70 Recorder Supply The supply recorder sensor reading is outside of the range of -50 to 70C
Temperature Out of (-58F to +158F) or, the probe check logic has determined there is a fault
Range with this sensor.
NOTE
The P5 Pre-Trip test must be run to inactivate the alarm.
dAL71 Recorder Return The return recorder sensor reading is outside of the range of -50 to 70C
Temperature Out of (-58F to +158F) or, the probe check logic has determined there is a fault
Range with this sensor.
NOTE
The P5 Pre-Trip test must be run to inactivate the alarm.
dAL72-74 USDA Temperatures 1, The USDA probe temperature reading is sensed outside of -50 to 70C (-58
2, 3 Out of Range to 158F) range.
dAL75 Cargo Probe 4 Out of The cargo probe temperature reading is outside of -50 to 70C (-58 to 158F)
Range range.
dAL76, 77 Future Expansion These alarms are for future expansion, and are not in use at this time.
dAL78-85 Network Data Point The network data point is outside of its specified range. The DataCORDER
1 - 8 Out of Range is configured by default to record the supply and return recorder sensors.
The DataCORDER may be configured to record up to 8 additional network data
points. An alarm number (AL78 to AL85) is assigned to each configured point.
When an alarm occurs, the DataCORDER must be interrogated to identify
the data point assigned.
When a humidity sensor is installed, it is usually assigned to AL78.
dAL86 RTC Battery Low The real time clock (RTC) backup battery is too low to adequately maintain
the RTC reading.
A real time clock failure is critical to the operation of the unit. If this alarm oc-
curs, replace the RTC battery at the next available opportunity. After replac-
ing the battery the following actions are required:
• Update the RTC setting
• Update the unit's software configuration
• Update the operational software
• Update all user selectable function code settings (defrost, setpoint, etc)
dAL87 RTC Failure An invalid time has been detected. Either the DataCORDER run time hour
and minute have not changed at the start of the hour, or the real time clock
(RTC) time has gained or lost more than 2 minutes in the hour. This situation
may be corrected by cycling the power, setting the clock or meeting the
above criteria for an hour.
dAL88 DataCORDER
A write of critical DataCORDER information to the EEPROM has failed.
EEPROM Failure
dAL89 Flash Memory Error An error has been detected in the process of writing daily data to the nonvol-
atile FLASH memory.
dAL90 Future Expansion This alarm is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
dAL91 Alarm List Full The DataCORDER alarm queue is determined to be full (eight alarms).
4–49 T-318
SECTION 5
OPERATION
5.1 Inspection (Before Loading)
! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. The unit may cycle the
fans and compressor unexpectedly as control requirements dictate.
a. If container is empty, check inside for the following:

1. Check channels or “T” bar floor for cleanliness. Channels must be free of debris for proper air circulation.
2. Check container panels, insulation, and door seals for damage. Make permanent or temporary repairs.
3. Visually check evaporator fan motor mounting bolts for proper securement (refer to Section 7.18).
4. Check for visible corrosion on the evaporator stator and fan deck (refer to Section 7.18).
5. Check for dirt or grease on evaporator fan or fan deck and clean if necessary.
6. Check evaporator coil for cleanliness or obstructions. Wash with fresh water (Refer to Section 7.15).
7. Check defrost drain pans and drain lines for obstructions and clear if necessary. Wash with fresh water.
8. Check panels on refrigeration unit for loose bolts and condition of panels. Make sure T.I.R. devices are in
place on access panels.
b. Check condenser coil for cleanliness. Wash with fresh water.
c. Open control box door. Check for loose electrical connections or hardware.
d. Check color of moisture-liquid indicator.
e. Check oil level in compressor sight glass (if applicable).
5.2 Connect Power
! WARNING
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) before turning OFF start-stop switch (ST), unit circuit
breaker(s) and external power source.
! WARNING
Make sure the power plugs are clean and dry before connecting to power receptacle.
5.2.1 Connection To 380/460 VAC Power

1. Make sure start-stop switch (ST on control panel) and circuit breaker (CB-1 in the control box) are in position
“O” (OFF).
2. Plug the 460VAC (yellow) cable into a de-energized 380/460VAC, 3-phase power source. Energize the
power source. Place circuit breaker (CB-1) in position “I” (ON). Close and secure control box door.
5.2.2 Connection to 190/230VAC Power
An autotransformer (Figure 5.1) is required to allow operation on nominal 230 volt power. It is fitted with a 230VAC
cable and a receptacle to accept the standard 460VAC power plug. The 230 volt cable is black in color while the
460 volt cable is yellow. The transformer may also be equipped with a circuit breaker (CB-2). The transformer is a
step-up transformer that will provide 380/460VAC, 3-phase, 50/60 hertz power to the unit when the 230VAC power
cable is connected to a 190/230VAC, 3-phase power source.
1. Make sure that the start-stop switch (ST, on control panel) and circuit breakers CB-1 (in the control box and
CB-2 (on the transformer) are in position “O” (OFF). Plug in and lock the 460VAC power plug at the recepta-
cle on the transformer.
2. Plug the 230VAC (black) cable into a de-energized 190/230VAC, 3-phase power source. Energize the
power source. Set circuit breakers CB-1 and CB-2 to position “I” (ON). Close and secure control box door.
5–1 T-318
Figure 5.1 Autotransformer
Circuit Breaker
(CB-2)
230-Volt
Dual Voltage
Modular 460 VAC Power
Autotransformer Receptacle
1. Dual Voltage Modular Autotransformer

2. Circuit Breaker (CB-2) 230V
3. 460VAC Power Receptacle
-----
5.3 Adjust Fresh Air Makeup Vent

The purpose of the fresh air makeup vent is to provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air circulation.
The vent must be closed when transporting frozen foods.
Air exchange depends on static pressure differential, which will vary depending on the container and how the con-
tainer is loaded.
Units may be equipped with a vent position sensor (VPS). The VPS determines the position of the fresh air vent
(upper or lower, as equipped) and sends data to the controller display.
5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent

Two slots and a stop are designed into the Upper Fresh Air disc for air flow adjustments. The first slot allows for a 0
to 30% air flow; the second slot allows for a 30 to 100% air flow.
To adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the wing nut and rotate the disc until the desired percentage of air flow
matches with the arrow. Tighten the wing nut.
To clear the gap between the slots, loosen the wing nut until the disc clears the stop.
Figure 5.2 gives air exchange values for an empty container.
Higher values can be expected for a fully loaded container.
T-318 5–2
Figure 5.2 Make Up Air Flow Chart
AIR FLOW
(CMH)
50HZ
250
TBAR
200 1 1/2”
TBAR
2 5/8”
150 TBAR 3”
100
50
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PERCENT OPEN
AIR FLOW
(CMH) 60HZ
300
TBAR
250 1 1/2”
TBAR
200 2 5/8”
TBAR 3”
150
100
50
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PERCENT OPEN
5.3.2 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent

a. Full Open or Closed Positions
Maximum air flow is achieved by loosening the wing nuts and moving the cover to the maximum open posi-
tion (100% position). The closed position is 0% air flow position. The operator may also adjust the opening
to increase or decrease the air flow volume to meet the required air flow.
b. Reduced Flow for Lower Fresh Air Makeup
NOTE
In order to prevent inaccurate display readings on units equipped with a Vent Position Sensor (VPS),
ensure that the rack and pinion drive of the VPS is not disrupted when adjusting the air makeup vent.
NOTE
Do not loosen the hex nut beyond its stop. Doing so may cause inaccurate display readings and errors
in DataCORDER reports.
5–3 T-318
Similar to the Upper Fresh Air Makeup vent, two slots and a stop are designed into the Lower Fresh Air
slide for air flow adjustments. The first slot allows for a 0 to 25% air flow; the second slot allows for a 25 to
100% air flow. To adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the hex nut and rotate the disc until the desired
percentage of air flow matches with the arrow. Tighten the hex nut. To clear the gap between the slots,
loosen the hex nut until the disc clears the stop.
On some models the air slide is supplied with two adjustable air control discs. The fresh air makeup can be
adjusted for 15, 35, 50 or 75 cubic meters per hour (CMH). The air flow has been established at 60 Hz
power and 2-1/2 inch T bar and with 15 mm (0.6 inch) H2O external static above free blow.
Loosen the hex nut, adjust each disc to the required air flow, then tighten hex nut.
NOTE
The main air slide is in the fully closed position during reduced air flow operation when equipped with
air control discs.
c. Air Sampling for Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Level

Loosen hex nuts and move the cover until the arrow on the cover is aligned with the “atmosphere sampling
port” label. Tighten the hex nuts and attach a 3/8 in. hose to the sampling port.
If the internal atmosphere content has reached an unacceptable level, the operator may adjust the disc
opening to meet the required air flow volume to ventilate the container.
5.3.3 Vent Position Sensor
The VPS allows the user to determine position of the fresh air vent via Cd45. This function code is accessible via
the code select key.
The vent position will display for 30 seconds whenever motion corresponding to 5CMH (3CFM) or greater is detected.
It will scroll in intervals of 5CMH (3CFM). Scrolling to Cd45 will display the Fresh Air Vent Position.
The position of the vent will be recorded in the DataCORDER whenever the unit is running under AC power and
any of the following:
Trip start
On every power cycle
Midnight
Manual change greater than 5 CMH (3 CFM) and remains in that position for at least four minutes
NOTE
The user has four minutes to make necessary adjustments to the vent setting. This time calculation
begins on the initial movement of the sensor. The vent can be moved to any position within the four
minutes. On completion of the first four minutes, the vent is required to remain stable for the next four
minutes. If vent position changes are detected during the four minute stability period, an alarm will be
generated. This provides the user with the ability to change the vent setting without generating multi-
ple events in the DataCORDER.
5.4 eAutoFresh Operation

The eAutoFresh system allows the opening and closing of the mechanical air vent slide. The opening and closing
of the slide is determined by the mode selected through Cd43.
The modes of operation are OFF, USER, TEST, DELAY, and GASLIMIT. Each mode of operation has submenus
with selectable parameters. Not all parameters are available in each submenu.
Upon power up, the controller will fully close the eAutoFresh air vent. Nine seconds after power up, the controller
will check if there is a carbon dioxide (CO2) sensor connected. When a CO2 sensor is detected, the controller will
enable access to the Gas Limit mode of operation. If no sensor is detected, the only modes of operation available
will be Test, User, and Delay. The controller will then resume operation in the last mode of operation before power
interruption.
T-318 5–4
5.4.1 eAutoFresh Pre-Trip Inspection
Pre-trip testing of the eAutoFresh system is performed during Pre-Trip test P0. Operation of the system may be
observed during this test.
Upon initiation of Pre-Trip P0, the current state will be saved and the vent will fully close. This will be followed by
two sequences of opening to 100% and returning to the closed position. No other eAutoFresh mode of operation
will be available until the two cycles of opening and closing have completed. Upon termination of the test, the vent
will open to the previous state and operation will return to the previous mode.
If the last mode was gASLM, the vent will open to the preset FLO setting, the controller will start taking new read-
ings and control based on those readings.
5.4.2 eAutoFresh Start-Up Procedure
To start the system, do the following:
a. Press the “CODE SELECT” key (see Figure 4.2).
b. Press the “UP or DOWN” arrow key until “Cd43” is displayed, then press “ENTER”.
c. Press the “UP or DOWN” arrow key to access the desired mode of operation. When the mode operation is dis-
played press the enter key to access the submenu parameters.
5.4.3 eAutoFresh Modes of Operation
NOTE
When setting any mode of operation, complete the entire process to ensure all parameters are set.
a. OFF
A setting of OFF will disable all automatic venting operations. The eAutoFresh vent will be driven fully closed and the
eAutoFresh opening set to 0 CMH in Cd44. This is the default mode whenever a frozen mode of operation has been
selected. When the frozen set point is selected, the current eAutoFresh setting is saved. The vent position will restore
when a perishable set point is selected.
b. USER
The USER mode provides ventilation for commodities that require fresh air circulation. The flow rate can be
accessed through the submenu if a perishable set point has been selected. To set the flow rate, press the ENTER
key to activate the selection mode. When FLO appears in the left hand window, use the UP or DOWN arrow key to
scroll to the desired opening. The range is from 0 to 220CM (0 to 129CF) in increments of 5. Press the ENTER key
to set the value and begin operation.
c. TEST
TEST mode allows the operator to test the movement of the mechanical slide air vent and calibrate the CO2 sensor.
tESt − When “tESt” appears in the left window, press the ENTER key to begin the test. The eAutoFresh slide will
open fully and then return to the closed position. The test may be observed by the operator to ensure proper opera-
tion of the vent. After completion of the TEST, the unit will return to the previous mode of operation.
NOTE
It is recommended that the calibration procedure only be performed during Pre-trip or when the con-
tainer has been fully vented.
CAL will attempt to calibrate the carbon dioxide sensor. When “CAL” mode is selected the display will flash “CAL”. The
operator is to hold the “ENTER” key for 5 seconds. The display will stop flashing and read “CAL” for 5 seconds. The
microprocessor will read the CO2 value, and then compare that value to a known zero value. If the sensor is within the
calibration parameter range, the microprocessor will determine the appropriate offset for the sensor. If the sensor is
outside of this range, for example if the container is loaded or has a high level of CO2, the controller will flash “NOCAL”
for 5 seconds then revert to the previous mode of operation.
d. DELAY
In DELAY mode, the operation of the eAutoFresh system will be delayed for a set amount of time. This allows time
for the cargo to reach set point. In DELAY mode, the eAutoFresh vent will open to the stored (FLO) value when the
return air temperature sensor (RTS) is at or below set point plus the return offset value (rtn) or the delay time (tIM),
whichever comes first. The eAutoFresh vent will be fully closed when return air temperature sensor is greater than
the set point plus the offset temperature (rtn).
To set the unit in Delay mode, scroll until “DELAY” appears in the left window, press the ENTER key to activate the
submenu. The first selection is the amount of time (tIM) for the delay. Select the amount of time for the delay by using
the UP and DOWN arrow keys. The range is from 1 to 72 hours in 1 hour increments. Press the ENTER key to set the
5–5 T-318
value and move to the FLO rate. Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll to the desired FLO rate. The range is from
0 to 220CM (0 to 129CF) in increments of 5 and 3 respectively. Press the ENTER key to set the value and move to the
return temperature offset. Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll to the desired rtn rate. The range of offset is from
0.6°C to 2.8°C (1.0°F to 2.8°F) in 0.1 degree increments. Press the ENTER key to set the value and begin operation.
e. GAS LIMIT (gASLM)

In GAS LIMIT mode, access to the submenu is available provided a perishable set point has been selected, and a
valid reading is detected from the carbon dioxide sensor. In “Gas limit” mode the microprocessor will monitor and
limit the amount of carbon dioxide within the container by opening and closing the eAutoFresh vent. The vent will
open to the (FLO) setting once the unit has completed initial temperature pull down or if the cargo temperature is
within 5C of set point and the carbon dioxide level has reached the max limit or if the Oxygen level has reached the
lower limit. After the first 15 minutes of the vent opening the controller will again evaluate the level of CO2, and/or
O2 levels. If after the first 15 minutes the gas limit values are satisfied, the vent will close, if either gas limit has not
been satisfied within 15 minutes the air exchange vent will open in 10 CMH increments every 15 minutes until both
gas concentrations are satisfied. Once all limits are satisfied the vent will return to the closed position. If conditions
are not met with the slide open 100% for 90 minutes Al29 will be activated.
To operate in Gas Limit mode, scroll until gASLM appears in the left window, press the ENTER key to activate the
submenu. The first selection is the maximum carbon dioxide (CO2LM). Select the max level by using the UP and
DOWN arrow keys.
The range is from 0 to 19% in 1% increments. Press the ENTER key to set the value and move to the minimum
Oxygen level (O2LM). The range is from 2 to 20% in 1% increments. Press the ENTER key to set the value and
move to the FLO rate. Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll to the desired FLO rate. The range is from 0 to
220CM (0 to 129CF) in increments of 5 and 3 respectively. Press the ENTER key to set the value and begin oper-
ation.
Operational Parameters (Sub Menu Options):
FLO indicates the opening to which the slide will move based on the stored value in CMH (in increments of 5) or
CFM depending on the selection of Cd46 (Airflow display units), Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the pressing of the deg
C/F key. CFM is displayed as CF, CMH is displayed as CM.
tIM is the time delay prior to the door opening. The time range is from 1 to 72 hrs in 1 hr increments.
CO2LM is the maximum level of CO2 that is allowed for the cargo. The range is from 0% to 19% in 1% increments,
the default setting is 10.
O2LM is the minimum level of O2 that is allowed for the cargo. The range is from 2% to 20% in 1% increments, the
default setting is 10.
Rtn is an offset value used to expand the return air temperature value to compensate for the fresh air entering the
container. The allowable range is from 0.6°C to 2.8°C or 1.0°F to 5.0°F in 0.1 degree increments the default setting
is 2.8°C (5°F).
5.5 CONNECT WATER-COOLED CONDENSER

The water-cooled condenser is used when cooling water is available and heating the surrounding air is objection-
able, such as in a ship’s hold. If water-cooled operation is desired, connect in accordance with the following sub-
paragraphs.
5.5.1 Water-Cooled Condenser with Water Pressure Switch
a. Connect the water supply line to the inlet side of condenser and the discharge line to the outlet side of the
condenser (see Figure 3.5).
b. Maintain a flow rate of 11 to 26 liters per minute (3 to 7 gallons per minute). The water pressure switch will
open to de-energize the condenser fan relay. The condenser fan motor will stop until the water pressure
switch closes.
NOTE
If controller configuration variable CnF48 is activated the condenser fan motor will activate if the HPS
opens twice in less than seven minutes. Power cycling the unit resets the counter.
c. To shift to air-cooled condenser operation, disconnect the water supply and the discharge line to the water-
cooled condenser. The refrigeration unit will shift to air-cooled condenser operation when the water pressure
switch closes or if the controller configuration variable CnF48 is activated, the condenser fan motor will acti-
vate if the HPS opens twice in less than seven minutes. Power cycling the unit resets the count.
T-318 5–6
5.5.2 Water-Cooled Condenser with Condenser Fan Switch
a. Connect the water supply line to the inlet side of condenser and the discharge line to the outlet side of the
condenser (see Figure 3.5).
b. Maintain a flow rate of 11 to 26 lpm (3 to 7gpm).
c. Set the condenser fan switch to position “O.” This will de-energize the condenser fan relay. The condenser
fan motor will stop until the CFS switch is set to position “I.”
NOTE
If controller configuration variable CnF48 is activated, the condenser fan motor will activate if the tem-
perature at the compressor discharge temperature sensor (CPDS) exceeds 115.5C (240F). The fan
will cycle off when the temperature drops to 90.5C (150F). If the CPDS sensor is faulty, the logic will
not operate.
! CAUTION
When condenser water flow is below 11lpm (3gpm) or when water-cooler is not in use, the CFS
switch MUST be set to position “I” or the unit will not operate properly.
d. To shift to air-cooled condenser operation, stop the unit, set the CFS switch to position “I,” and restart the
unit. Disconnect the water lines to the water-cooled condenser.
5.6 Connect Remote Monitoring Receptacle

If remote monitoring is required, connect remote monitor plug at the unit receptacle, see item 11, Figure 3.6.
When the remote monitor plug is connected to the remote monitoring receptacle, the following remote circuits are
energized:
Circuit Function
Sockets B to A Energizes remote cool light
Sockets C to A Energizes remote defrost light
Sockets D to A Energizes remote in-range light
5.7 Starting and Stopping Instructions
! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s) (CB-1 & CB-2) and the START-STOP switch (ST) are in
the “O” (OFF) position before connecting to any electrical power source.
5.7.1 Starting the Unit
a. With power properly applied, the fresh air damper set, and if required, the water-cooled condenser connected
(refer to Section 5.2, Section 5.3, & Section 5.5, place the START−STOP switch to “I” (ON), see Figure 3.6.
b. The Controller Function Codes for the container ID (Cd40), software version (Cd18) and unit model number
(Cd20) will be displayed in sequence.
c. Continue with Start Up Inspection (refer to Section 5.8).
5.7.2 Stopping the Unit

To stop the unit, place the START-STOP switch in position “O” (OFF).Start−Up Inspection
5–7 T-318
5.8 Physical Inspection
5.8.1 Physical Inspection
a. Check rotation of condenser and evaporator fans.

b. Check compressor oil level (refer to Section 7.8.6).
5.8.2 Check Controller Function Codes

Check and, if required, reset controller Function Codes (Cd27 through Cd39) in accordance with desired operating
parameters (refer to Section 4.2.2).
5.8.3 Start Temperature Recorder

Partlow Recorders
a. Open recorder door and check battery of electronic recorder. Be sure key is returned to storage clip of
mechanical recorder.
b. Lift stylus (pen) by pulling the marking tip outward until the stylus arm snaps into its retracted position.
c. Install new chart making sure chart is under the four corner tabs. Lower the stylus until it has made contact
with the chart. Close and secure the recorder door.
DataCORDER
a. Check and, if required, set the DataCORDER Configuration in accordance with desired recording parameter.
Refer to Section 4.8.3.
b. Enter a “Trip Start.” To enter a “Trip Start,” do the following:
1. Depress the ALT MODE key. When the left display shows, dC, depress the ENTER key.
2. Scroll to Code dC30.
3. Depress and hold the ENTER key for five seconds.
4. The “Trip Start” event will be entered in the DataCORDER.
5.8.4 Complete Inspection

Allow unit to run for five minutes to stabilize conditions and perform a pre-trip diagnosis in accordance with Section 5.9.
5.9 Pre-Trip Diagnostics
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
When Pre−Trip key is pressed, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated.
At the completion of Pre−Trip activity, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reac-
tivated.
Pre-Trip diagnostics provides automatic testing of the unit components using internal measurements and compari-
son logic. The program will provide a “PASS” or “FAIL” display to indicate test results.
The testing begins with access to a Pre-trip selection menu. The user may have the option of selecting one of three
automatic tests.
These tests will automatically perform a series of individual Pre-trip tests. The user may also scroll down to select
any of the individual tests.
When only the short sequence is configured, it will appear as “AUtO” in the display. Otherwise “AUtO1” will indicate
the short sequence and “AUtO2” will indicate the long sequence. The test short sequence will run tests P0 through
P6. The long test sequence will run tests P0 through P10.
T-318 5–8
A detailed description of the Pre-trip test codes is listed in Table 4–7. If no selection is made, the Pre-trip menu
selection process will terminate automatically. However, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated man-
ually if required.
Scrolling down to the “rSLts” code and pressing ENTER will allow the user to scroll through the results of the last
pre-trip testing run. If no pre-testing has been run (or an individual test has not been run) since the unit was pow-
ered up, “−−−−” will be displayed.
To start a Pre-trip test, do the following:
NOTE
1. Prior to starting a Pre−trip test, verify that unit voltage (Cd07) is within tolerance and unit amperage draw (Cd04,
Cd05, Cd06) are within expected limits. Otherwise, tests may fail incorrectly.
2. All alarms must be rectified and cleared before starting tests.
3. Pre−trip may also be initiated via communications. The operation is the same as for the keypad initiation
described below except that should a test fail, the Pre−trip mode will automatically terminate. When initiated
via communications, a Pre−trip test may not be interrupted with an arrow key, but the Pre−trip test can be
terminated with the PRE−TRIP key.
a. Press the PRE−TRIP key to accesses the Pre−trip test selection menu.
b. TO RUN AN AUTOMATIC TEST: Scroll through the selections by pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW
keys to display AUTO, AUTO 2 or AUTO 3 as desired and then press the ENTER key.
1. The unit will execute the series of tests without any need for direct user interface. These tests vary in length,
depending on the component under test.
2. While tests are running, “P#-#” will appear on the left display, where the #’s indicate the test number and
sub-test. The right display will show a countdown time in minutes and seconds, indicating the amount of
time remaining in the test.
! CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic testing the unit will suspend operation awaiting opera-
tor intervention.
When an automatic test fails, it will be repeated once. A repeated test failure will cause “FAIL” to be shown on the
right display, with the corresponding test number to the left.
The user may then press the DOWN ARROW to repeat the test, the UP ARROW to skip to the next test or the
PRE-TRIP key to terminate testing. The unit will wait indefinitely until the user manually enters a command.
! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip test Auto 2 runs to completion without being interrupted, the unit will terminate
pre-trip and display “Auto 2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation until the user depresses
the ENTER key!
When an Auto test runs to completion without a failure, the unit will exit the Pre-trip mode and return to normal con-
trol operation.
If configuration variable CnF42 is set to IN, a DataCORDER trip start will be entered. If CnF42 is set to OUT, the
trip start will not be entered. However, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated manually if required.
c. TO RUN AN INDIVIDUAL TEST: Scroll through the selections by pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW
keys to display an individual test code. Pressing ENTER when the desired test code is displayed.
1. Individually selected tests, other than the LED/ Display test, will perform the operations necessary to verify
the operation of the component. At the conclusion, PASS or FAIL will be displayed.
This message will remain displayed for up to three minutes, during which time a user may select
another test. If the three minute time period expires, the unit will terminate pre-trip and return to control
mode operation.
5–9 T-318
2. While the tests are being executed, the user may terminate the pre-trip diagnostics by pressing and holding
the PRE-TRIP key.
The unit will then resume normal operation. If the user decides to terminate a test but remain at the test
selection menu, the user may press the UP ARROW key. When this is done all test outputs will be de-
energized and the test selection menu will be displayed.
3. During Pre−trip testing, current limiting and pressure limiting are both active, except during P−7 (High Pres-
sure Switch Testing) when pressure limiting is turned off.
d. Pre-Trip Test Results

At the end of the pre-trip test selection menu, the message “P,” “rSLts” (pre-trip results) will be displayed. Pressing
the ENTER key will allow the user to see the results for all subtests (i.e., 1-0, 1-1, etc).
The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for all the tests run to completion since power up. If a test has not
been run since power up, “−−−−−” will be displayed.
Once all pre-test activity is completed, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated manually if required.
5.10 Probe Diagnostics

A complete temperature probe check is performed during the P5 Pre−trip test. A probe check is also run at the end
of a defrost cycle; the defrost light will remain on during this period. If supply probes are within limits and return
probes are within limits, the unit will return to normal operation. During normal operation, the controller continu-
ously monitors and compares adjacent temperature probe readings.
The probe check procedure consists of running the evaporator fans for up to eight minutes in order to compare the
readings from the adjacent temperature probes. If a significant difference in temperature readings is detected
between probes, a defrost cycle, followed by another probe check may be initiated. Any continued disagreement
between probes will prompt the controller to invalidate the failed temperature probe, and the backup probe will be
used for temperature control.
In Perishable Mode, both pairs of supply and return probes are monitored for probe disagreement. Probe disagree-
ment is considered a difference of 0.5°C (0.9°F) or greater between the supply air sensors and/ or a difference of
2.0°C (3.6°F) between the return air sensors. Probe disagreement found in either pair can trigger a defrost probe
check.
In Frozen Mode, only the controlling probes are considered. Disagreement of the controlling probes can trigger a
defrost probe check, which will occur when the difference between the sensors is greater than 2.0°C (3.6°F). Normally,
the controlling probes are the return probes but if both return probes are invalidated, the supply probes are used for
control purposes. Probe disagreement of the non−controlling probe pair will not trigger a defrost probe check.
If, after the defrost probe check, the supply probes agree and return probes agree, all supply and return sensors
are considered valid and the unit returns to normal control.
In the Case of Probe Disagreement:
If the supply probes disagree and the return probes agree, the controller will invalidate the worst supply probe. If
the probe check is run as part of Pre−trip P−5, an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time
defrost probe check, the invalidated probe will be passed over and no alarm will be triggered. However, if the best
supply probe is greater than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference with respect to its return probes, the best supply probe is also
invalidated. If unit is in Perishable Mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both supply probes.
If the supply probes agree and the return probes disagree, invalidate the worst return probe. If the probe check is
being run as part of Pre−trip P−5, an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time defrost probe
check, the invalidated probe will be passed over and no alarm will be necessary. If the best return probe is greater
than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference with respect to its supply probes, then the best return probe is also invalidated. If the
unit is in perishable mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both return probes.
5.11 Emergency Bypass Operation

Operation by the refrigeration controller may be overridden by use of the EMERGENCY BYPASS switch. The
EMERGENCY BYPASS switch functions to bypass the controller in the event of controller failure.
The EMERGENCY BYPASS switch functions to bypass the controller in the event of controller failure. The EMER-
GENCY DEFROST switch functions to bypass the controller and place the unit in the defrost mode.
T-318 5–10
5.11.1 Emergency Bypass Operation
To place the unit in the emergency bypass mode, cut the wire tie installed at the switch mounting (see Figure 3.6)
and place the EMERGENCY BYPASS switch in the BYPASS position. This will in turn activate the Emergency
Bypass System (EBS) control module.
To operate the fans only, the MODE switch must be in the FANS ONLY position and the EMERGENCY BYPASS
Switch must be in the ON position.
The EBS module uses the system safety devices (high pressure switch, motor internal protectors, and heat termi-
nation thermostat) to protect the system while in Emergency Bypass Mode.
! CAUTION
The unit will remain in the full cooling mode as long as the emergency bypass switch is in the
BYPASS position and the MODE SWITCH is in the FULL COOL position.
If the cargo is at risk of being damaged by low temperatures, the operator must monitor con-
tainer temperature and manually cycle operation as required to maintain temperature within
required limits.
In the ON position the EBS will be enabled. With the MODE SWITCH in the FULL COOL MODE. The following will
occur simultaneously:
1. The EBS switch will enable EBS input.
2. The phase detection circuit will detect the phase rotation and close to provide power to the compressor contactor.
3. The condenser fan contact will close to energize the condenser contactor and provide power to the con-
denser fan motor.
4. The evaporator fan contact will close to energize the high speed evaporator contactor and provide power to
the evaporator fan motor.
5. The EBS electronic module will open the SMV to 100%.
To return the unit to normal operation, place the EBS switch in the NORMAL OPERATION position. When emer-
gency operation is no longer required, re-install the wire tie at the switch mounting.
5.11.2 Emergency Defrost Operation

To place the unit in the emergency defrost mode of operation, cut the wire tie installed at the switch mounting (see
Figure 3.6) and place the switch in the EMERGENCY DEFROST position.
NOTE
1. If the unit is in the emergency bypass cooling mode, the emergency defrost switch will override this mode
and place the unit in defrost.
2. The IN-RANGE LIGHT is de-energized when in the emergency defrost mode.
The switch is a normally open four-pole switch, which is placed in the EMERGENCY DEFROST position to:
a. De-energize the compressor, condenser fan and evaporator fan contactors.
b. Illuminate the EMERGENCY DEFROST LIGHT.
c. Energize the heater contactor.
d. Illuminate the DEFROST LIGHT.
! CAUTION
The unit will remain in the DEFROST mode as long as the emergency defrost switch is in the
DEFROST position. To prevent cargo damage, the operator must monitor container tempera-
ture and manually cycle operation as required to maintain temperature within required limits.
5–11 T-318
To return the unit to normal operation, place the switch in the NORMAL OPERATION position. When emergency
defrost is no longer required, re-install the wire tie at the switch mounting.
5.12 Arctic Mode

With arctic mode enabled, if the ambient is colder than -10.0C there is a 30-minute time delay at startup for any of
the components in the system, except for the controller and the compressor crankcase heater (CCH), which should
be active at this point. In arctic mode, the CCH is energized for 30 minutes to warm the oil in the compressor and
boil off any liquid refrigerant that may be present in the crankcase.
If Pre-Trip is initiated during the 30-minute time period, Pre-Trip will be allowed to run normally. Once Pre-Trip is
over, the controller will revert to its normal control mode logic.
If ambient is warmer than -10.0C (14F), the system will run its normal startup logic.
Arctic mode is configurable by using the configuration variable #29, refer to Table 4–4.
5.12.1 Crankcase Heater

When the crankcase heater is installed, it will be operational whenever the compressor is off and there is power to
the unit. The heater is connected to a set of normally closed auxiliary contacts on the compressor contactor.
T-318 5–12
SECTION 6
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 Unit Will Not Start or Starts Then Stops

Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
External power source OFF Turn on
Start-Stop switch OFF or defective Check
No power to unit
Circuit breaker tripped or OFF Check
Autotransformer not connected 5.2.2
Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
Control transformer defective Replace
Loss of control power
Fuses (F3A, F3B) blown Check
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open 7.16
Condenser fan motor internal protector open 7.11
Component(s) Not Operating Compressor internal protector open 7.8
High pressure switch open 6.7
Heat termination thermostat open Replace
Low line voltage Check
Compressor hums, Single phasing Check
but does not start Shorted or grounded motor windings 7.8
Compressor seized 7.8
6.2 Unit Operates Long or Continuously Long in Cooling

Reference
Hot load (Failure to Pre-cool) Normal
Container
Defective box insulation or air leak Repair
Shortage of refrigerant 7.7.1
Evaporator coil covered with ice 6.6
Evaporator coil plugged with debris 7.15
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards 7.15/7.16
Defective evaporator fan motor 7.16
Air bypass around evaporator coil Check
Refrigeration System Controller set too low Reset
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve par- Open valves
tially closed completely
Dirty condenser 7.10
Compressor worn 7.8
Current limit (function code Cd32) set to wrong value 4.4.3
Suction modulation valve malfunction 7.19
6–1 T-318
6.3 Unit Runs But Has Insufficient Cooling
Reference
Compressor Compressor valves defective 7.8
Abnormal pressures 6.7
Controller malfunction 6.9
Evaporator fan or motor defective 7.16
Refrigeration System
Condenser Pressure Transducer defective Check
Shortage of refrigerant 7.7.1
6.4 Unit Will Not Heat or Has Insufficient Heating

Reference
No operation of any kind Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
External power source OFF Turn ON
Circuit breaker or fuse defective Replace
Control Transformer defective Replace
No control power Evaporator fan internal motor protector open 7.16
Heat relay defective Check
Heater termination switch open 7.15
Heater(s) defective 7.15
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective or rotating backwards 7.15/7.16
Unit will not heat or has Evaporator fan motor contactor defective Replace
insufficient heat Controller malfunction 6.9
Defective wiring Replace
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Low line voltage 3.3
6.5 Unit Will Not Terminate Heating

Reference
Controller improperly set Reset
Controller malfunction 6.9
Unit fails to stop heating
Heater termination thermostat remains closed along with
7.15
the heat relay
T-318 6–2
6.6 Unit Will Not Defrost Properly
Reference
Defrost timer malfunction (Cd27) Table 4–5
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Will not initiate defrost Defective wiring Replace
automatically Defrost temperature sensor defective or heat termination
Replace
thermostat open
Manual defrost switch defective Replace
Will not initiate defrost manually
Defrost temperature sensor open 7.24
Initiates but relay (DR) drops out Low line voltage 3.3
Initiates but does not defrost
Heater(s) burned out 7.15
Frequent defrost Wet load Normal
6.7 Abnormal Pressures (Cooling)

Reference
Condenser coil dirty 7.10
Condenser fan rotating backwards 7.11
Condenser fan inoperative 7.11
High discharge pressure Refrigerant overcharge or noncondensibles 7.7.1
Discharge pressure regulator valve defective 7.21
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Suction service valve partially closed Open
Filter-drier partially plugged 7.13
Low refrigerant charge 7.7.1
Expansion valve defective 7.14
Low suction pressure No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow 7.15
Excessive frost on evaporator coil 6.6
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards 7.16.3
Discharge pressure regulator valve defective 7.21
Suction and discharge pressures Heat exchanger defective Replace

tend to equalize when unit is Compressor valves defective 7.8
operating
Compressor cycling/stopped Check
6–3 T-318
6.8 Abnormal Noise or Vibrations
Reference
Loose mounting bolts Tighten
Worn bearings 7.8
Compressor Worn or broken valves 7.8
Liquid slugging 7.14
Insufficient oil 7.8.6
Bent, loose or striking venturi Check
Condenser or Evaporator Fan Worn motor bearings 7.11/7.16
Bent motor shaft 7.11/7.16
6.9 Microprocessor Malfunction

Reference
Defective Sensor 7.24
Defective wiring Check
Will not control
Fuse (F1, F2) blown Replace
Stepper motor suction modulation valve circuit malfunction 7.19
6.10 No Evaporator Air Flow or Restricted Air Flow

Reference
Frost on coil 6.6
Evaporator coil blocked
Dirty coil 7.15
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open 7.16
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective 7.16
No or partial evaporator air flow
Evaporator fan(s) loose or defective 7.16
Evaporator fan contactor defective Replace
T-318 6–4
6.11 EAutoFresh Not Operating
Reference
Unit not Configured for eAutoFresh Operation No action
Cd43 in Off mode 5.4.2
Wiring disconnected Check wiring
Vent not opening
Stepper drive defective 7.26.2
Stepper motor defective 7.26.2
Unit operating in frozen mode 5.4.3
Check CO2 sensor 5.4.3
Gas Limit mode unavailable Wiring disconnected Check wiring
Unit operating in frozen mode 5.4.3
Enter Key not held for sufficient length of time 5.4.3
Unable to calibrate CO2 sensor CO2 outside of acceptable levels Check
Unit not Configured for eAutoFresh Operation No action
Cd44 displays -----
6.12 Thermostatic Expansion Valve Malfunction

Reference
Low refrigerant charge 7.7.1
External equalizer line plugged Open
Wax, oil or dirt plugging valve or orifice ice formation at
7.14
valve seat
Low suction pressure with Superheat too high 7.7.1
high superheat
Power assembly failure 7.14
Loss of element/bulb charge 7.14
Broken capillary 7.14
Foreign material in valve 7.14
Superheat setting too low 7.14
High suction pressure with
External equalizer line plugged ice holding valve open Open
low superheat
Foreign material in valve 7.14
Pin and seat of expansion valve eroded or held open by
Liquid slugging in compressor 7.14
foreign material
Improper bulb location or installation 7.14
Fluctuating suction pressure
Low superheat setting 7.14
6.13 Autotransformer Malfunction

Reference
Unit will not start Circuit breaker (CB1 or CB2) tripped Check
Autotransformer defective 7.22
Power source not turned ON Check
460 VAC power plug is not inserted into the receptacle 5.2.2
6–5 T-318
6.14 Water-Cooled Condenser (WCC) or Water Pressure Switch (WPS)
Reference
High discharge pressure Dirty coil 7.12
Noncondensibles 7.12
Condenser fan starts and stops Water pressure switch malfunction Check
Water supply interruption Check
T-318 6–6
SECTION 7
SERVICE
NOTE
Use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing refrigerant. When working with refrigerants you
must comply with all local government environmental laws. In the U.S.A., refer to EPA section 608.
! WARNING
Charge Only With R−134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.
7.1 Section Layout

Service procedures are provided in this section beginning with refrigeration system service, then refrigeration system
component service, electrical system service, temperature recorder service and general service. Refer to the Table of
Contents to locate specific topics.
7.2 Manifold Gauge Set

The manifold gauge set (see Figure 7.1) is used to determine system operating pressure, add refrigerant charge,
and to equalize or evacuate the system.
Figure 7.1 Manifold Gauge Set
Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure

Gauge Gauge
Discharge Pressure
Utility Connection to:
Valve Low Side Suction Pressure
A. Refrigerant cylinder
(shown backseated) High Side Connection Valve
B. Vacuum Pump
Connection (shown frontseated)
C. Oil Container
When the Suction Pressure Valve is frontseated (turned all the way in), the suction (low) pressure can be checked
at the Suction Pressure Gauge.
When the Discharge Pressure Valve is frontseated, the discharge (high) pressure can be checked at the Discharge
Pressure Gauge.
When both valves are backseated (all the way out), high pressure vapor will flow into the low side.
When the Suction Pressure Valve is open and the Discharge Pressure Valve is shut, the system can be charged
through the Utility Connection. Oil can also be added to the system.
A R-134a manifold gauge/hose set with self-sealing hoses (see Figure 7.2) is required for service of the models
covered within this manual. The manifold gauge/hose set is available from Carrier Transicold. (Carrier Transicold
P/N 07-00294-00, which includes items 1 through 6, Figure 7.2).
7–1 T-318
If the manifold gauge/hose set is new or was exposed to the atmosphere, it will need to be evacuated to remove
contaminants and air as follows:
1. Backseat (turn counterclockwise) both field service couplings (see Figure 7.2) and midseat both hand
valves.
2. Connect the yellow hose to a vacuum pump and refrigerant 134a cylinder.
3. Evacuate to 10 inches of vacuum and then charge with R-134a to a slightly positive pressure of 0.1kg/cm2
(1.0 psig).
4. Frontseat both manifold gauge set valves and disconnect from cylinder. The gauge set is now ready for use
Figure 7.2 .R-134a Manifold Gauge/Hose Set
To Low Side To High Side

Access Valve Access Valve
2 1
6
3
4 4
7 2 5
1. RED Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose 4. Hose Fitting with O-ring (M14 x 1.5)
(SAE J2196/R-134a) 5. High Side Field Service Coupling (Red Knob)
2. Hose Fitting (0.5-16 Acme) 6. BLUE Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose
3. YELLOW Refrigeration and/or Evacuation (SAE J2196/R-134a)
Hose (SAE J2196/R-134a) 7. Low Side Field Service Coupling (Blue Knob)
-----
7.3 Service Valves

Compressor suction, compressor discharge, and liquid line service valves (see Figure 7.3) are provided with a
double seat and a gauge connection, which enables servicing of the compressor and refrigerant lines.
Turning the valve stem clockwise (all the way forward) will frontseat the valve to close off the suction, discharge or
liquid line and open the gauge port to the compressor or low side. Turning the stem counterclockwise (all the way
out) will backseat the valve to open the connections and close off the port.
With the valve stem midway between frontseat and backseat, both of the service valve connections are open to the
access valve path.
For example, the valve stem is first fully backseated when connecting a manifold gauge to measure pressure.
Then, the valve is opened 1/4 to 1/2−turn to measure the pressure.
T-318 7–2
Figure 7.3 Service Valve
2
1 3
4
6 7
5
1. Line Connection 5. Compressor or Filter Drier Inlet Connection

2. Access Valve 6. Valve (Frontseated)
3. Stem Cap 7. Valve (Backseated)
4. Valve stem
-----
Connection of the manifold gauge/hose set (see Figure 7.4) is dependent on the component being serviced. If only
the compressor is being serviced, the high side coupling is connected to the discharge service valve.
For service of the low side (after pump down), the high side coupling is connected to the liquid line service valve.
The center hose connection is brought to the tool being used (vacuum, tank, etc.).
Connecting the manifold gauge set:
a. Remove service valve stem cap and make sure the valve is backseated.
b. Remove service port cap (See Figure 7.3).
c. Connect the high side field service coupling (see Figure 7.2) to the discharge or liquid line valve service
valve port.
d. Turn the high side field service coupling knob (red) clockwise, which will open the high side of the system to
the gauge set.
e. Connect the low side field service coupling to the suction service valve port.
f. Turn the low side field service coupling knob (blue) clockwise, which will open the low side of the system to
the gauge set.
g. To read system pressures, slightly midseat the high side and suction service valves.
! CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the manifold gauge set, be sure set is brought to suc-
tion pressure before disconnecting.
Removing the Manifold Gauge Set:

a. While the compressor is still ON, backseat the high side service valve.
b. Midseat both hand valves on the manifold gauge set and allow the pressure in the manifold gauge set to be
drawn down to suction pressure. This returns any liquid that may be in the high side hose to the system.
c. Backseat the suction service valve. Backseat both field service couplings and frontseat both manifold set
valves. Remove the couplings from the service ports.
d. Install both service valve stem caps and service port caps (finger-tight only).
7–3 T-318
7.4 Pump the Unit Down
To service the filter-drier, moisture-liquid indicator, expansion valve, suction modulation valve, quench valve, or
evaporator coil, pump the refrigerant into the high side as follows:
a. Attach manifold gauge set to compressor service valves (refer to Section 7.2).
b. Start the unit and run in a cooling mode for 10 to 15 minutes. Frontseat the liquid line service valve. Place
start-stop switch in the OFF position when the suction reaches a positive pressure of 0.1kg/cm2 (1.0psig).
c. Frontseat the suction service valve. The refrigerant will be trapped between the compressor suction service
valve and the liquid line valve.
d. Before opening up any part of the system, a slight positive pressure should be indicated on the pressure gauge.
If a vacuum is indicated, emit refrigerant by cracking the liquid line valve momentarily to build up a slight posi-
tive pressure.
e. When opening up the refrigerant system, certain parts may frost. Allow the part to warm to ambient temperature
before dismantling. This avoids internal condensation, which puts moisture in the system.
f. After repairs have been made, be sure to perform a refrigerant leak check (refer to Section 7.5), and evac-
uate and dehydrate the low side (refer to Section 7.6).
g. Check refrigerant charge (refer to Section 7.7).
7.5 Refrigerant Leak Checking
! WARNING
a. The recommended procedure for finding leaks in a system is with a R-134a electronic leak detector. Testing
joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for locating large leaks.
b. If the system is without refrigerant, charge the system with refrigerant 134a to build up pressure between 2.1
to 3.5kg/cm2 (30 to 50psig). Remove refrigerant cylinder and leak-check all connections.
NOTE
Only refrigerant 134a should be used to pressurize the system. Any other gas or vapor will contami-
nate the system, which will require additional purging and evacuation of the system.
c. If required, remove refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system and repair any leaks.
d. Evacuate and dehydrate the unit (refer to Section 7.6).
e. Charge unit per Section 7.7.
7.6 Evacuation and Dehydration

7.6.1 General
Moisture is the deadly enemy of refrigeration systems. The presence of moisture in a refrigeration system can have
many undesirable effects. The most common are copper plating, acid sludge formation, “freezing-up” of metering
devices by free water, and formation of acids, resulting in metal corrosion.
7.6.2 Preparation
a. Evacuate and dehydrate only after pressure leak test (refer to Section 7.5).
b. Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehydrate any system include a vacuum pump (8m-/hr = 5cfm vol-
ume displacement) and an electronic vacuum gauge. The pump is available from Carrier Transicold, P/N
07-00176-11. The micron gauge is P/N 07−00414−00.
c. If possible, keep the ambient temperature above 15.6°C (60°F) to speed evaporation of moisture. If the ambient
temperature is lower than 15.6°C (60°F), ice might form before moisture removal is complete. Heat lamps or
alternate sources of heat may be used to raise the system temperature.
d. Additional time may be saved during a complete system pump down by replacing the filter-drier with a sec-
tion of copper tubing and the appropriate fittings. Installation of a new drier may be performed during the
charging procedure.
T-318 7–4
Figure 7.4 Refrigeration System Service Connections
1 2 3 4
13
S D
7
8
11
9
6
12 10
1. Discharge Service Valve 8. Center Hose - YELLOW

2. Compressor 9. High Side Hose - RED
3. Suction Service Valve 10. Electronic Vacuum Gauge
4. Receiver or Water Cooled Condenser 11. Manifold Gauge Set
5. Liquid Service Valve 12. Refrigerant Cylinder
6. Vacuum Pump 13. Reclaimer
7. Low Side Hose - BLUE
-----
7.6.3 Complete System

a. Remove all refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system.
b. The recommended method to evacuate and dehydrate the system is to connect three evacuation hoses
(see Figure 7.4) to the vacuum pump and refrigeration unit. Be sure the service hoses are suited for evacu-
ation purposes.
c. Test the evacuation setup for leaks by backseating the unit service valves and drawing a deep vacuum with the
vacuum pump and gauge valves open. Shut off the pump and check to see if the vacuum holds. Repair leaks if
necessary.
d. Midseat the refrigerant system service valves.
e. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum gauge valves, if they are not already open. Start the vacuum
pump. Evacuate unit until the electronic vacuum gauge indicates 2000 microns. Close the electronic vac-
uum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure the vac-
uum holds.
f. Break the vacuum with clean dry refrigerant 134a gas. Raise system pressure to approximately 0.2kg/cm2
(2psig), monitoring it with the compound gauge.
g. Remove refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system.
h. Repeat steps e.and f. one time.
i. Remove the copper tubing and change the filter-drier. Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close the electronic
vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait five minutes to see if vacuum
holds. This procedure checks for residual moisture and/or leaks.
j. With a vacuum still in the unit, the refrigerant charge may be drawn into the system from a refrigerant con-
tainer on weight scales. Continue to Section 7.7.
7–5 T-318
7.6.4 Procedure - Partial System
a. If the refrigerant charge has been removed from the compressor for service, evacuate only the compressor
by connecting the evacuation set-up at the compressor service valves. Follow evacuation procedures of the
preceding paragraph except leave compressor service valves frontseated until evacuation is completed.
b. If refrigerant charge has been removed from the low side only, evacuate the low side by connecting the evac-
uation set-up at the compressor service valves and liquid service valve except leave the service valves front-
seated until evacuation is completed.
c. Once evacuation has been completed and the pump has been isolated, fully backseat the service valves to
isolate the service connections and then continue with checking and, if required, adding refrigerant in accor-
dance with normal procedures.
7.7 Refrigerant Charge
! WARNING
7.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge
NOTE
To avoid damage to the earth’s ozone layer, use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing
refrigerant. When working with refrigerants you must comply with all local government environmental
laws. In the U.S., refer to EPA section 608.
a. Connect the gauge manifold to the compressor discharge and suction service valves. For units operating on
a water cooled condenser, change over to air-cooled operation.
b. Bring the container temperature to approximately 1.7°C (35°F) or -17.8°C (0°F). Set the controller set point
to -25°C (-13°F) to ensure that the suction modulation valve is at maximum allowed open position.
c. Partially block the condenser coil inlet air. Increase the area blocked until compressor discharge pressure is
raised to approximately 12kg/cm (175psig).
d. On units equipped with a receiver, the level should be between the glasses. On units equipped with a water-
cooled condenser, the level should be at the center of the glass. If the refrigerant level is not correct, con-
tinue with the following paragraphs to add or remove refrigerant as required.
7.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge)

a. Evacuate unit and leave in deep vacuum (refer to Section 7.6).
b. Place cylinder of R-134a on scale and connect charging line from cylinder to liquid line valve. Purge
charging line at liquid line valve and then note weight of cylinder and refrigerant.
c. Open liquid valve on cylinder. Open liquid line valve half-way and allow the liquid refrigerant to flow into the
unit until the correct weight of refrigerant (refer to Section 3.2) has been added as indicated by scales.
NOTE
It may be necessary to finish charging unit through suction service valve in gas form, due to pressure
rise in high side of the system (refer to Section 7.7.3).
d. Backseat manual liquid line valve (to close off gauge port). Close liquid valve on cylinder.
e. Start unit in cooling mode. Run approximately 10 minutes and check the refrigerant charge.
T-318 7–6
7.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge)
a. Examine the unit refrigerant system for any evidence of leaks. Repair as necessary (refer to Section 7.5).
b. Maintain the conditions outlined in Section 7.7.1.
c. Fully backseat the suction service valve and remove the service port cap.
d. Connect charging line between suction service valve port and cylinder of refrigerant R-134a. Open VAPOR valve.
e. Partially frontseat (turn clockwise) the suction service valve and slowly add charge until the refrigerant
appears at the proper level.
7.8 Compressor
! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before replacing the compressor.
NOTES
1. The compressor should not operate in a vacuum greater than 500mm/hg (20 inches/hg).
2. The service replacement compressor is sold without shutoff valves (but with valve pads), and without termi-
nal box and cover. Customer should retain the original terminal box, cover, and high pressure switch for use
on replacement compressor.
3. Check oil level in service replacement compressor (refer to Section 7.8.6).
4. A compressor terminal wiring kit must be ordered as a separate item when ordering replacement compres-
sor. Appropriate installation instructions are included with kit.
5. Refer to Table 7–7 and Table 7–8 for applicable compressor wear limits and torque values.
6. Refer to Figure 7.37 for charts on compressor pressure, temperature and motor current curves.
7.8.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor

a. Remove the protective guard from lower section of the unit.
b. Pump down low side (refer to Section 7.4) or frontseat compressor service valves and remove refrigerant
from compressor using a refrigerant recovery system.
c. Locate the compressor junction box. Tag and disconnect wiring from compressor terminals and remove
compressor junction box.
d. Loosen service valve mounting bolts, break seal, and then remove bolts.
e. Remove compressor plate mounting bolts.
f. Remove compressor and mounting plate. Refer to Section 3.2 for weight of compressor.
7–7 T-318
Figure 7.5 Compressor
1 2 3
16
15
14
4
13
12 5
6
11
10
9 8 7
1. Discharge Valve Flange 9. Sight Glass

2. High Side Pressure Connection 10. Oil Drain Plug
3. Low Side Pressure Connection 11. Oil Charging Valve
4. Suction Valve Flange 12. Bearing Head
5. Motor End Cover 13. Oil Pump
6. Serial/Model No. Plate 14. Oil Fill Plug
7. Crankcase Heater 15. Cylinder Head
8. Bottom Plate 16. Valve Plate
-----
g. Remove high pressure switch (HPS) from compressor and check operation of switch (refer to Section 7.9.1).
h. Remove compressor mounting bolts from mounting plate and install mounting plate on replacement com-
pressor.
i. Install replacement compressor terminal wiring kit, following instructions included with kit.
j. Install high pressure switch on compressor.
k. Install compressor and mounting plate in unit.
l. Connect junction box(es) to compressor and connect all wiring per wiring diagram. Install junction box cover(s).
m. Install new gaskets on service valves.
n. Install mounting bolts in service valves and torque to 2.77 to 4.15mkg (20-30ft/lb).
o. Attach two hoses (with hand valves near vacuum pump) to the suction and discharge service valves. Dehy-
drate and evacuate compressor to 500 microns (75.9 cm Hg vacuum = 29.90 inches Hg vacuum). Turn off
valves on both hoses to pump.
p. Fully backseat (open) both suction and discharge service valves.
q. Remove vacuum pump lines.
r. Start unit and check refrigerant charge (refer to Section 7.7).
s. Check moisture-liquid indicator for wetness. Change filter-drier if necessary (refer to Section 7.13).
t. Check compressor oil level per Section 7.8.6. Add oil if necessary.
T-318 7–8
7.8.2 Compressor Disassembly
! WARNING
Before disassembly of any external compressor component make sure to relieve possible
internal pressure by loosening the bolts and tapping the component with a soft hammer to
break the seal.
! WARNING
Removing the compressor motor press-fit stator in the field is not recommended. The rotor
and stator are a matched pair and should not be separated.
When disassembling compressor, matchmark parts so they may be replaced in their same relative positions (see
Figure 7.5). Refer to Table 7–7 and Table 7–8 for compressor wear limits and bolt torque values.
a. Place the compressor in a position where it will be convenient to drain the oil. Remove the oil fill plug (see
Figure 7.5) to vent the crankcase. Loosen the drain plug in bottom plate and allow the oil to drain out slowly.
Remove the plug slowly to relieve any crankcase pressure. Some units have a plug in the bottom center of
the crankcase, which may be removed for draining the motor end more quickly.
Figure 7.6 Exploded View of Valve Plate

1 2 3 4 5 7
JACK HERE
1. Cylinder Head Gasket 5. Valve Plate

2. Discharge Valve Screw & Lockwasher 6. Valve Plate Assembly
3. Discharge Valve Stop 7. Valve Plate Gasket
4. Discharge Valve
-----
Figure 7.7 Bottom Plate Removed
2
3
1. Oil Pressure Relief Valve 4.Cap Screw

2. Oil Return Check Valve 5.Connecting Rod and Cap Assembly
3. Oil Suction Tube
-----
7–9 T-318
b. Loosen cylinder head cap screws. If the cylinder head is stuck, tap the center of the cylinder head with a wooden or
lead mallet. Do not strike the side of the cylinder head. Be careful not to drop the head or damage the gasket sealing
surface. Remove cylinder head bolts and gasket (see Figure 7.6).
c. Remove valve stops and valves. After they have been removed, free the valve plate from the cylinder deck
by using the outside discharge valve hold-down cap screw as a jack screw through the tapped hole of the
valve plate. Remove the valve plate gasket.
d. Turn the compressor on its side and remove the bottom plate oil suction screen and screen hold down plate.
Inspect the screen for holes or an accumulation of dirt. The screen can be cleaned with a suitable solvent.
e. Match mark each connecting rod cap (see Figure 7.7) and connecting rod for correct reassembly. Remove the
bolts and connecting rod caps. Push the piston rods up as far as they will go without having the piston rings
extend above the cylinders.
! CAUTION
The copper tube that connects to the oil suction strainer extends out the bottom with the bottom
plate removed. Take precautions to avoid bending or breaking it while changing crankcase positions.
f. If necessary, remove the oil return check valve (see Figure 7.7). Inspect it for proper operation (flow in one direction
only). Replace the assembly with a new unit if check valve operation is impaired.
g. To remove the oil pump (see Figure 7.8) remove eight cap screws, oil pump bearing head assembly, gasket,
and thrust washer.
Figure 7.8 Oil Pump and Bearing Head
Set screw must be removed

1
2
5 4 3
1. Oil Pump & Bearing Head 4. Oil Inlet Port

2. Thrust Washer 5. Oil Pump Inlet
3. Oil Pickup Tube
-----
NOTE
If the oil pump was not operating properly, the entire oil pump & bearing head assembly must be
replaced. Individual parts are not available. If the pump requires inspection or cleaning, disassemble
and reassemble by referring to Figure 7.9. Clean all parts and coat all moving parts with compressor
oil before proceeding with reassembly.
T-318 7–10
Figure 7.9 Low Profile Oil Pump
12
7
5 6 11
4
2 3
1
10
8
9
1. Cap screws 7. O-Ring

2. Cover 8. Oil Pump & Bearing
3. Reversing Assembly 9. Set Screw
4. Pinion 10. Relief Valve
5. Gear 11. Pin
6. Drive 12. Gasket
-----
h. Be very careful not to damage the motor windings when removing the motor end cover (see Figure 7.10),
as the cover fits over the winding coils. Loosen the cap screws, break the seal, and then remove all cap
screws except one in the top of the cover. While holding the cover in place, remove the remaining cap
screw. Do not allow the cover to drop from its own weight. To prevent striking the winding, remove the cover
horizontally and in line with the motor axis.
Figure 7.10 Motor End Cover
7
6
4 5
3
2
1
1. Strainer Screws and Washers 5. Valve Gasket

2. Suction Strainer 6. Suction Service Valve
3. Motor End Cover Gasket 7. Valve Cap Screw
4. Motor End Cover
-----
i. Remove the refrigerant suction strainer. If it is removed with ease, it may be cleaned with solvent and
replaced. If the strainer is broken, corroded or clogged with dirt that is not easily removed, replace the
strainer. Install new gaskets upon reassembly.
j. Block the compressor crankshaft so that it cannot turn. Use a screwdriver to bend back the tabs on the lock-
washer, and remove the equalizer tube and lock screw assembly (see Figure 7.11). The slingers at the end of
the tube draw vapor from the crankcase. Remove the rotor using a jack bolt. Insert a brass plug into the rotor
hole to prevent damage to the end of the crankshaft.
7–11 T-318
k. If the piston rings extend beyond the cylinder tops, the pistons can be pulled through the bottom plate open-
ing after the piston rings are compressed. A piston ring compressor will facilitate removal. Each piston pin is
locked in place by lock rings, which are snapped into grooves in the piston wall (see Figure 7.12).
l. Since the stator cannot be replaced in the field, the terminal plate assembly need not be disturbed unless a
leak exists and the plate assembly needs to be replaced. If no terminal plate repair is required, proceed with
reassembly.
Figure 7.11 Equalizing Tube and Lock Screw Assembly
1
2
1. Equalizer Tube and Lock Screw Assembly 3. Counterweight - Motor End

2. Lockwasher
-----
Figure 7.12 Crankshaft Assembly
6
5
7
8
9 4
3
2
10
1. Cap Screw 6. Connecting Rod

2. Cap 7. Compression Ring
3. Crankshaft 8. Piston
4. Thrust Washer 9. Pin
5. Rotor Drive Key 10. Retainer
-----
7.8.3 Compressor Reassembly

Clean all compressor parts, using a suitable solvent with proper precautions. Coat all moving parts with the proper
compressor oil before assembly. Refer to Table 7–8 for applicable compressor torque values.
T-318 7–12
7.8.4 Preparation
a. Suction and Discharge Valves
If the valve seats look damaged or worn, replace valve plate assembly. Always use new valves because it is diffi-
cult to reinstall used valves so that they will seat as before removal. Any valve wear will cause leakage.
Figure 7.13 Suction Valve and Positioning Rings
1. Suction Valve
2. Suction Valve Positioning Spring
3. Valve Plate Dowel Pin
-----
Suction valves are positioned by dowel pins (see Figure 7.13). Do not omit the suction valve positioning springs.
Place the springs so that the ends bear against the cylinder deck (middle bowed away from cylinder deck). Use
new gaskets when reinstalling valve plates and cylinder heads.
b. Compression Rings
The compression ring is chamfered on the inside circumference. This ring is installed with the chamfer toward the
top. Stagger the ring end gaps so they are not aligned.
Figure 7.14 Piston Ring
The gap between the ends of the piston rings can be checked with a feeler gauge by inserting the ring into the piston
bore approximately one inch below the top of the bore. Square the ring in the bore by pushing it slightly with a piston.
The maximum and minimum allowable ring gaps are 0.33 and 0.127mm (0.013 and 0.005 inch) respectively.
7.8.5 Installing the Components
a. Push pistons from the inside of the crankcase through the cylinders, be careful not to break rings. Place
rods so that the chamfered side is against radius of crankpins. Install the crankshaft and thrust washer
through the pump end of the compressor. Ensure thrust washer is fitted on locating pin. Do not damage
main bearings. Bring rods in position against crank bearings.
b. Install the pump end thrust washer on the two dowel pins located on the bearing head (see Figure 7.8).
! CAUTION
Ensure that the thrust washer does not fall off dowel pins while installing oil pump.
7–13 T-318
! CAUTION
The set screw on the crankshaft must be removed for this type of oil pump (see Figure 7.8).
c. Install bearing head assembly with a new gasket on the compressor crankshaft. Carefully push oil pump on
by hand, ensuring the thrust washer remains on the dowel pins. The tang on the end of the drive engages
the slot in the crankshaft, and the oil inlet port on the pump is aligned with the oil pickup tube in the crank-
case. The pump should be mounted flush with the crankcase, and oriented with the oil pick up tube and oil
inlet port, and aligned as shown in Figure 7.8.
d. Align gasket and install eight cap screws in mounting flange. Refer to Table 7–8 for torque values.
e. Install matching connecting rod caps Be sure rod is not bound and crankshaft will turn correctly as each set
of rod bolts is torqued.
f. Be sure key fits properly when installing rotor on shaft. Screw on equalizer tube and lock screw assembly
with lock washer and bend over tabs of lock washer. Assemble suction strainer to motor and cover, and bolt
cover to crankcase. Assemble valve plates and gaskets. Assemble cylinder heads & gaskets. Turn shaft by
hand to see that it moves freely.
g. Install the oil suction screen, the oil suction screen hold down plate, and the bottom plate.
7.8.6 Compressor Oil Level
! CAUTION
Use only Carrier Transicold approved Polyol Ester Oil (POE) − Castrol-Icematic SW20 compres-
sor oil with R-134a. Buy in quantities of one quart or smaller. When using this hygroscopic oil,
immediately reseal. Do not leave container of oil open or contamination will occur.
a. Checking the Oil Level in the Compressor
1. Turn unit on and operate in cooling mode for at least 20 minutes.

2. Check the front oil sight glass on the compressor to ensure that no foaming of the oil is present after 20 min-
utes of operation. If the oil is foaming excessively after 20 minutes of operation, check the refrigerant system
for flood-back of liquid refrigerant. Correct this situation before performing step 3.
3. Turn unit off to check the oil level. The correct oil level range should be between the bottom to one-eighth
level of the sight glass. If the level is above one-eighth, oil must be removed from the compressor. To
remove oil from the compressor, follow step d in this section. If the level is below the bottom of the sight
glass, add oil to the compressor following step b below.
b. Adding Oil with Compressor in System
1. The recommended method is to add oil using an oil pump at the oil fill valve (see item 11, Figure 7.5).
2. In an emergency where an oil pump is not available, oil may be drawn into the compressor through the suc-
tion service valve.
Connect the suction connection of the gauge manifold to compressor suction service valve port and
immerse the common connection of the gauge manifold in a container of refrigeration oil. Extreme care
must be taken to ensure the manifold common connection remains immersed in oil at all times. Other-
wise air and moisture will be drawn into compressor.
Crack the suction service valve and gauge valve to vent a small amount of refrigerant through the com-
mon connection and the oil to purge the lines of air. Close the gauge manifold valve.
With the unit running, frontseat the suction service valve and induce a vacuum in the compressor crank-
case. SLOWLY crack the suction gauge manifold valve and oil will flow through the suction service
valve into the compressor. Add oil as necessary.
c. Adding Oil to Service Replacement Compressor
Service replacement compressors are shipped without oil. If oil is present in crankcase, test the oil to ensure it is
the correct oil and that moisture level is acceptable.
When adding oil to a service replacement compressor add three liters (6.3 pints) using an oil pump at the oil fill valve
(see item 11, Figure 7.5). This quantity is recommended to allow for return of any oil that may be in the refrigerant sys-
tem. Install compressor and check oil level after it is placed in operation (refer to Section 7.8.6).
T-318 7–14
d. Removing Oil from the Compressor
1. If the oil level is above one-eighth sight glass, excess oil must be removed from the compressor.
2. Close (frontseat) suction service valve and pump unit down to 1.2 to 1.3kg/cm (2 to 4psig). Frontseat dis-
charge service valve and remove remaining refrigerant.
3. Loosen the oil drain plug on the bottom plate of the compressor and drain the proper amount of oil from the com-
pressor to obtain the correct level.Backseat the suction and discharge service valves.
4. Repeat step a to ensure proper oil level.
7.9 High Pressure Switch

7.9.1 Checking High Pressure Switch
! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a pressure regulator.
NOTE
The high pressure switch is non-adjustable.
a. Remove switch as outlined in Section 7.9.2.

b. Connect ohmmeter or continuity light across switch terminals. Ohm meter will indicate no resistance or continuity
light will be illuminated if the switch closed after relieving compressor pressure.
c. Connect hose to a cylinder of dry nitrogen, see Figure 7.15.
Figure 7.15 High Pressure Switch Testing
1 4
5
2
3
6
1. Cylinder Valve and Gauge 4. Pressure Gauge (0 to 36 kg/cm2 = 0 to 400

2. Pressure Regulator psig)
3. Nitrogen Cylinder 5. Bleed-Off Valve
6. 1/4 Inch Connection
-----
2
d. Set nitrogen pressure regulator at 26.4kg/cm (375psig) with bleed-off valve closed.
e. Close valve on cylinder and open bleed-off valve.
f. Open cylinder valve. Slowly close bleed-off valve to increase pressure on switch. The switch should open at a
static pressure up to 25kg/cm2 (350 psig). If a light is used, light will go out. If an ohmmeter is used, the meter
will indicate open circuit.
g. Slowly open bleed-off valve to decrease the pressure. The switch should close at 18kg/cm2 (250 psig).
7–15 T-318
7.9.2 Replacing the High Pressure Switch
a. Turn unit start-stop switch OFF. Frontseat both suction and discharge service valves to isolate compressor.
Remove the refrigerant from the compressor.
b. Disconnect wiring from defective switch. The high pressure switch is located on the center head and is
removed by turning counterclockwise (see Figure 3.3).
c. Install a new high pressure switch after verifying switch settings (refer to Section 7.9.1).
d. Evacuate and dehydrate the compressor per Section 7.6.
7.10 Condenser Coil

The condenser consists of a series of parallel copper tubes expanded into copper fins. The condenser coil must be
cleaned with fresh water or steam so the air flow is not restricted. To replace the coil, do the following:
! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting the power plug.
a. Using a refrigerant reclaim system, remove the refrigerant charge.
b. Remove the condenser coil guard.
c. Unsolder lines and remove the line to the receiver or water-cooled condenser.
d. Remove coil mounting hardware and remove the coil.
e. Install replacement coil and solder connections.
f. Leak-check the coil connections per Section 7.5. Evacuate the unit per Section 7.6 then charge the unit
with refrigerant per Section 7.7.
7.11 Condenser Fan and Motor Assembly
! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting the power plug.
The condenser fan rotates counter-clockwise (viewed from front of unit). The fan pulls air through the condenser
coil, and discharges the air horizontally through the front of the unit. To replace motor assembly:
a. Open condenser fan screen guard.

b. Loosen two square head set screws on fan (thread sealer has been applied to set screws at installation).
c. Disconnect wiring from motor junction box.
! CAUTION
Take necessary steps (place plywood over coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor from
falling into condenser coil.
d. Remove motor mounting hardware and replace the motor. It is recommended that new locknuts be used
when replacing motor. Connect wiring per wiring diagram.
e. Install fan loosely on motor shaft (hub side in). DO NOT USE FORCE. If necessary, tap the hub only, not the
hub nuts or bolts. Install venturi. Apply “Loctite H” to fan set screws. Adjust fan within venturi so that the
outer edge of the fan projects 3.2 to 6.4mm (3/16” 1/16”) back from edge of the venturi. Spin fan by hand to
check clearance.
f. Close and secure condenser fan screen guard.
g. Apply power to unit and check fan rotation. If fan motor rotates backward, reverse wire numbers 5 and 8.
T-318 7–16
7.12 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning
The water-cooled condenser is of the shell and coil type with water circulating through the cupro-nickel coil. The
refrigerant vapor is admitted to the shell side and is condensed on the outer surface of the coil.
Rust, scale, and slime on the water-cooling surfaces inside of the coil interfere with the transfer of heat, reduce
system capacity, cause higher head pressures and increase the load on the system.
By checking the leaving water temperature and the actual condensing temperature, it can be determined if the con-
denser coil is becoming dirty. A larger than normal difference between leaving condensing water temperature and
actual condensing temperature, coupled with a small difference in temperature of entering and leaving condensing
water, is an indication of a dirty condensing coil.
To find the approximate condensing temperature, with the unit running in the cooling mode, install a gauge 0 to
36.2 kg/cm (0 to 500psig) on the compressor discharge service valve.
Example: Discharge pressure is 10.3kg/cm2 (146.4psig). Referring to Table 7–9 (R-134a pressure/ temperature
chart), the 10.3kg/cm2 (146.4psig) value converts to 43C (110F).
If the water-cooled condenser is dirty, it may be cleaned and de-scaled by the following procedure:
a. Turn unit off and disconnect main power.
b. Disconnect water pressure switch tubing by loosening the two flare nuts. Install one-quarter inch flare cap
on water-cooled condenser inlet tube (replaces tubing flare nut). De-scale tubing if necessary.
What You Will Need:
1. Oakite Aluminum Cleaner®164, available as a powder in 20kg (44lb) pails and 205kg (450lb) drums.
2. Oakite composition No. 32, available as a liquid in cases, each containing 3.785 liters (4 U.S. gallon) bottles
and also in carboys of 52.6kg (116lbs) net.
3. Fresh clean water.
4. Acid proof pump and containers or bottles with rubber hose.
NOTE
When Oakite compound No. 32 is being used for the first time, the local Oakite Technical Service rep-
resentative should be called in for assistance in planning the procedure. They will advise the reader on
how to do the work with a minimum dismantling of equipment, estimate the time and amount of com-
pound required, preparation, how to control and conclude the de-scaling operation by rinsing and neu-
tralizing equipment before putting it back into service.
Summary of Procedure:
1. Drain water from condenser tubing circuit.
2. Clean water tubes with Aluminum Cleaner® 164 to remove mud and slime.
3. Flush.
4. De-scale water tubes with Oakite No. 32.
5. Flush.
6. Neutralize.
7. Flush.
8. Put unit back in service under normal load and check head (discharge) pressure.
Detailed Procedure:
1. Drain and flush the water circuit of the condenser coil. If scale on the tube inner surfaces is accompanied by
slime, a thorough cleaning is necessary before de-scaling process can be accomplished.
2. To remove slime or mud, use Oakite Aluminum Cleaner® 164. Mix 170 grams (6 ounces) per 3.785 liters (1
U.S. gallon) of water. Mix cleaner in one half the volume of water, while stirring, and then add remaining
water. Warm this solution and circulate through the tubes until all slime and mud has been removed.
3. After cleaning, flush tubes thoroughly with fresh clean water.
7–17 T-318
4. Prepare a 15% by volume solution for de-scaling by diluting Oakite compound No. 32 with water. This is accom-
plished by slowly adding 0.47 liter (1 U.S. pint) of the acid (Oakite No. 32) to 2.8 liters (3 U.S. quarts) of water.
! WARNING
Oakite No. 32 is an acid. Be sure that the acid is slowly added to the water. DO NOT PUT
WATER INTO THE ACID - This will cause spattering and excessive heat.
! WARNING
Wear rubber gloves and wash the solution from the skin immediately if accidental contact
occurs. Do not allow the solution to splash onto concrete. PUT WATER INTO THE ACID - this
will cause spattering and excessive heat.
5. Fill the tubes with this solution by filling from the bottom. See Figure 7.16.
Figure 7.16 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning, Forced Circulation
6
5 8
4
3
9
2
10
1
11
12
1. Pump support 7. Vent

2. Tank 8. Close vent pipe valve when pump is running
3. Suction 9. Condenser
4. Pump 10. Remove water regulating valve
5. Priming Connection (Centrifugal pump50 gpm 11. Return
at 35’ head) 12. Fine mesh screen
6. Globe valves
-----
NOTE
It is important to provide a vent at the top for escaping gas.
6. Allow the Oakite No. 32 solution to soak in the tube coils for several hours, periodically pump-circulating it
with an acid-proof pump.
An alternate method may be used whereby a pail (see Figure 7.17) filled with the solution and attached to
the coils by a hose can serve the same purpose by filling and draining. The solution must contact the scale at
every point for thorough de-scaling. Air pockets in the solution should be avoided by regularly opening the
vent to release gas. Keep flames away from the vent gases.
7. The time required for de-scaling will vary, depending upon the extent of the deposits. One way to determine
when de-scaling has been completed is to titrate the solution periodically, using titrating equipment provided
free by the Oakite Technical Service representative. As scale is being dissolved, titrate readings will indicate
that the Oakite No. 32 solution is losing strength. When the reading remains constant for a reasonable time,
this is an indication that scale has been dissolved.
T-318 7–18
Figure 7.17 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning Gravity Circulation
5
2
3’ to 4’
1. Fill condenser with cleaning solution. Do not 3. Condenser

add solution more rapidly than vent can 4. Vent pipe
exhaust gases caused by chemical action. 5. 1” pipe
2. Approximately 5’
-----
8. When de-scaling is complete, drain the solution and flush thoroughly with water.
NOTE
If condenser cooling water is not being used as drinking water or is not re-circulated in a closed or
tower system, neutralizing is not necessary.
9. Following the water flush, circulate a 56.7 gram (2 ounce) per 3.785 liter (1 U.S. gallon) solution of Oakite
Aluminum Cleaner® 164 thru the tubes to neutralize. Drain this solution.
10. Flush the tubes thoroughly with fresh water.
11. Put the unit back in service and operate under normal load. Check the head pressure. If normal, a thorough
de-scaling has been achieved.
What You Can Do For Further Help:

Contact the Engineering and Service Department of the OAKITE PRODUCTS CO., 675 Central Avenue, New Provi-
dence, NJ 07974 U.S.A. (or visit www.oakite.com) for the name and address of the service representative in your area.
7.13 Filter−Drier
On units equipped with a water-cooled condenser, if the sight glass appears to be flashing or bubbles are con-
stantly moving through the sight glass when the suction modulation valve is fully open, the unit may have a low
refrigerant charge or the filter-drier could be partially plugged.
a. To Check Filter-Drier:
1. Test for a restricted or plugged filter-drier by feeling the liquid line inlet and outlet connections of the drier
cartridge. If the outlet feels cooler than the inlet, then the filter-drier should be changed.
2. Check the moisture-liquid indicator, if indicator shows a high level of moisture, the filter-drier should be replaced.
7–19 T-318
b. To Replace Filter-Drier:
1. Pump down the unit (refer to Section 7.4) and replace filter-drier.
2. Evacuate the low side in accordance with Section 7.6.
3. After unit is in operation, inspect for moisture in system and check charge.
7.14 Thermostatic Expansion Valve

The thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) (see Figure 3.2) is an automatic device that maintains constant superheat
of the refrigerant gas leaving the evaporator, regardless of suction pressure.
TXV functions are:

1. Automatic control of the refrigerant flow to match the evaporator load.
2. Prevention of liquid refrigerant entering compressor.
Unless the valve is defective, it seldom requires maintenance other than periodic inspection to ensure that the ther-
mal bulb is tightly secured and properly insulated. See Figure 7.18.
NOTE
TXV Bulb Clamp is soldered to the suction line.
Figure 7.18 Thermostatic Expansion Valve Bulb
2 3
1
5 4
1. Suction Line 4. TXV Bulb

2. Thumbscrew 5. Foam Insulation
3. TXV Bulb Clamp
-----
7.14.1 Checking Superheat
NOTE
Proper superheat measurement should be completed at -18°C (0°F) container box temperature where possible.
a. Open the upper right (EFM#1) access panel (see Figure 3.1) to expose the expansion valve.
b. Attach a temperature sensor near the expansion valve bulb and insulate. Make sure the suction line is clean and that
firm contact is made with the sensor.
c. Connect an accurate gauge to the service port directly upstream of the suction modulating valve.
d. Set the temperature set point to -18°C (0°F) and run unit until conditions stabilize.
e. The readings may cycle from a high to a low reading. Take readings of temperature and pressure every three to five
minutes for a total of 5 or 6 readings.
f. From the temperature/pressure chart (Table 7–9), determine the saturation temperature corresponding to
the evaporator outlet test pressures at the suction modulation valve.
g. Subtract the saturation temperatures in step f from the temperatures measured in step e. The difference is
the superheat of the suction gas. Determine the average superheat. It should be 4.5 to 6.7°C (8 to 12°F).
T-318 7–20
7.14.2 TXV Replacement
NOTES
1. The TXV is a hermetic valve, it does not have adjustable superheat (See Figure 7.19).
2. All connections on the hermetic TXV are bi-metallic, copper on the inside and stainless on the outside.
3. All joints on the hermetic TXV (inlet, outlet and equalizer lines) are brazed.
4. Bi-metallic connections heat up very quickly.
Figure 7.19 Thermostatic Expansion Valve
2
5
3
4
1. Hermetic Thermostatic Expansion Valve 4. Inlet Connection

2. Non-adjustable Superheat Stem 5. Outlet Connection
3. Equalizer Connection 6. Hermetic Expansion Valve Bulb
-----
a. Removing the TXV:
1. Pump down the unit per Section 7.4.
2. If TXV replacement is to be performed from the front of the unit, open the upper right (EFM#1) access panel
(see Figure 3.1) to remove evaporator fan motor.
3. Remove cushion clamp that secures the valve body to the bracket.
4. Unbraze the equalizer connection (1/4”), the outlet connection (5/8”), and then the inlet connection (3/8”). See
Figure 7.21. Be careful to protect the insulation on the heaters and their wires.
5. Open the insulation flap. Flap is secured with Velcro (Item 3, Figure 7.20).
6. Loosen the thumb screw and slide the bulb, out by pulling it towards the front of the unit.
Figure 7.20 Hermetic Thermostatic Expansion Valve Bulb Location

4
2
6
1 5
1. Hermetic Expansion Valve Bulb 4. Velcro strip

2. Insulation 5. Bulb Clamp
3. Insulation Flap 6. Thumb Screw
-----
7–21 T-318
Figure 7.21 Hermetic Thermostatic Expansion Valve Brazing Procedure
Braze Rod (’Sil-Phos” = 5.5% Silver, 6% Phosphorus)

Copper Tube
(Apply heat for 10-15 seconds)
Bi-metallic Tube Connection Use of a wet cloth is not necessary due to rapid
(Apply heat for 2-5 seconds) heat dissipation of the bi-metallic connections
b. Installing the TXV

1. Braze inlet connection to inlet line (see Figure 7.21).
2. Braze outlet connection to outlet line.
3. Braze the equalizer connection to the equalizer line.
4. Reinstall the cushion clamp.
5. Thread the thermal bulb through the opening above the evaporator coil (see Figure 3.2), and slide it under
the strap and secure the thumb screw. Close the insulation flap. Reinstall bulb access panel.
6. Check superheat (refer to step Figure 7.14.1).
7.15 Evaporator Coil & Heater Assembly

The evaporator section, including the evaporator coil, should be cleaned regularly. The preferred cleaning fluid is
fresh water or steam. Another recommended cleaner is Oakite 202 or similar, following manufacturer’s instructions.
The two drain pan hoses are routed behind the condenser fan motor and compressor. The drain pan line(s) must
be open to ensure adequate drainage.
7.15.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement
a. Pump unit down. (Refer to Section 7.4).
b. With power OFF and power plug removed, remove the screws securing the panel covering the evaporator
section (upper panel).
c. Disconnect the defrost heater wiring.
d. Disconnect the defrost temperature sensor (see Figure 3.2) from the coil.
e. Remove middle coil support.
f. Remove the mounting hardware from the coil.
g. Unsolder the two coil connections, one at the distributor and the other at the coil header.
h. After defective coil is removed from unit, remove defrost heaters and install on replacement coil.
i. Install coil assembly by reversing above steps.
j. Leak check connections per Section 7.5. Evacuate the unit per Section 7.6, and add refrigerant charge per
Section 7.7.
7.15.2 Evaporator Heater Replacement

The heaters are wired directly back to the contactor and if a heater failure occurs during a trip, the heater set containing
that heater may be disconnected at the contactor.
The next Pre-trip (P1) will detect that a heater set has been disconnected and indicate that the failed heater should be
replaced. To remove a heater, do the following:
T-318 7–22
a. Before servicing unit, make sure the circuit breakers (CB-1 and CB-2) and start-stop switch (ST) are in the
OFF position, and the power plug is disconnected.
b. Remove the upper back panel.
c. Determine which heater(s) need replacing by checking resistance of each heater set. Refer to Section 3.3
for heater resistance values. Once the set containing the failed heater is determined, cut the splice connec-
tion and retest to determine the actual failed heater(s).
d. Remove hold-down clamp securing heater(s) to coil.
e. Lift the bent end of the heater (with the opposite end down and away from coil). Move heater to the side
enough to clear the heater end support and remove.
7.16 Evaporator Fan and Motor Assembly

The evaporator fans circulate air throughout the container by pulling air in the top of the unit. The air is forced
through the evaporator coil where it is either heated or cooled and then discharged out the bottom of the refrigera-
tion unit into the container. The fan motor bearings are factory lubricated and do not require additional grease.
7.16.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly
! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.
a. Remove access panel (see Figure 3.2) by removing mounting bolts and TIR locking device. Reach inside of
unit and remove the Ty-Rap securing the wire harness loop. Disconnect the connector by twisting to unlock
and pulling to separate.
b. Loosen four 1/4-20 clamp bolts that are located on the underside of the fan deck at the sides of the fan
assembly. Slide the loosened clamps back from the fan assembly.
c. Slide the fan assembly out from the unit and place on a sturdy work surface.
7.16.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly

a. Attach a spanner wrench to the two 1/4-20 holes located in the fan hub. Loosen the 5/8-18 shaft nut by holding the span-
ner wrench stationary and turning the 5/8-18 nut counter-clockwise (see Figure 7.22).
b. Remove the spanner wrench. Use a universal wheel puller and remove the fan from the shaft. Remove the
washers and key.
c. Remove the four 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts that are located under the fan that support the motor and stator housing.
Remove the motor and plastic spacer.
7.16.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly

a. Assemble the motor and plastic spacer onto the stator.
NOTE
When removing the black nylon evaporator fan blade, care must be taken to assure that the blade is
not damaged. In the past, it was a common practice to insert a screwdriver between the fan blades to
keep it from turning. This practice can no longer be used, as the blade is made up of a material that
will be damaged. It is recommended that an impact wrench be used when removing the blade. Do not
use the impact wrench when reinstalling, as galling of the stainless steel shaft can occur.
b. Apply Loctite to the 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts and torque to 0.81 mkg (70 inch-pounds).
c. Place one 5/8 flat washer on the shoulder of the fan motor shaft. Insert the key in the keyway and lubricate
the fan motor shaft and threads with a graphite-oil solution (such as Never-seez).
d. Install the fan onto the motor shaft. Place one 5/8 flat washer with a 5/8-18 locknut onto the motor shaft and
torque to 40 foot-pounds.
7–23 T-318
Figure 7.22 Evaporator Fan Assembly
4 5
6
3
2 5
1. Stator 6. Impeller Fan

2. Flat washer, 1/4 7. Key
3. Bolt, 1/4-20 x 3/4 8. Mylar Protector
4. Locknut, 5/8-18 9. Evaporator Motor
5. Flat washer, 5/8
-----
e. Install the evaporator fan assembly in reverse order of removal. Torque the four 1/4-20 clamp bolts to 0.81
mkg (70 inch-pounds). Apply power momentarily to check for proper fan rotation (refer to Section 3.3).If fan
spins backward, then motor wiring or motor is defective.
f. Replace access the panel making sure that the panel does not leak. Make sure that the TIR locking device
is lockwired.
7.17 Evaporator Fan Motor Capacitor

For units equipped with single permanent-split capacitor fan motors.
7.17.1 When To Check For A Defective Capacitor
a. If the fan motor will not change speed. For example: in perishable mode, the motors should run in high
speed, in economy perishable mode fans should switch speeds and in frozen mode, the fans should run in
low speed.
NOTE
Evaporator fan motors always start in high speed.
b. Fan motor running in wrong direction (after checking for correct wiring application).
c. Motor will not start and IP-EMs are not open.
T-318 7–24
7.17.2 Removing the Capacitor
! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before servicing capacitor(s)
! WARNING
With power OFF discharge the capacitor before disconnecting the circuit wiring.
Capacitors must be discharged properly before testing. To discharge the capacitor, first turn the unit power OFF
and disconnect the unit power plug. Then place a 20,000 ohm, 2 watt resistor across the terminals of the capacitor
for approximately 30 seconds.
The capacitors are located on the motor and may be removed by two methods:
1. If container is empty, open upper rear panel of the unit.
2. If container is full, turn the unit power OFF and disconnect power plug. Remove the evaporator fan motor
access panel (see Figure 3.1). For removal of the evaporator fan assembly, refer to Section 7.16.
7.17.3 Checking the Capacitor

If the capacitor is suspected of malfunction, you may
choose to simply replace it. Direct replacement requires a capacitor of the same value. Two methods for checking
capacitor function are:
1. Volt-ohmmeter set on RX 10,000 ohms.
Connect ohmmeter leads across the capacitor terminals and observe the meter needle. If the capacitor is good, the nee-
dle will make a rapid swing toward zero resistance and then gradually swing back toward a very high resistance reading.
If the capacitor has failed open, the ohmmeter needle will not move when the meter probes touch the terminals. If
the capacitor is shorted, the needle will swing to zero resistance position and stay there.
2. Capacitor analyzer:
The function of the analyzer is to read the microfarad value of a capacitor and to detect insulation breakdown under
load conditions. The important advantages of an analyzer are its ability to locate capacitors that have either failed
to hold their microfarad ratings or those that are breaking down internally during operation. It is also useful in iden-
tifying capacitors when their microfarad rating marks have become unreadable.
7.18 Evaporator Section Cleaning

Containers and Container units that are exposed to certain fumigants may develop visible surface corrosion. This
corrosion will show up as a white powder found on the inside of the container and on the reefer unit evaporator sta-
tor and fan deck.
Analyses by Carrier Transicold environmental specialists have identified the white powder as consisting predomi-
nantly of aluminum oxide. Aluminum oxide is a coarse crystalline deposit most likely the result of surface corrosion
on the aluminum parts within the container. If left untreated over time, it may build up in thickness and eventually
flake as a lightweight white powder.
The surface corrosion of aluminum is brought about by exposure to chemicals such as sulfur dioxide and possibly
other fumigants that are commonly used for fumigation and protection of some perishable cargo such as grapes,
for example. Fumigation is the process by which a chemical is released into an enclosed area to eliminate infesta-
tions of insects, termites, rodents, weeds and soil−born disease.
Typically any aluminum oxide that becomes detached from evaporator fan stators will be blown into the wet evapo-
rator coil where it will be caught and then flushed out of the unit during routine defrost cycles.
However, it is still highly recommended that after carrying cargo subject to fumigation procedures, that the inside of
the unit be thoroughly cleansed prior to reuse.
7–25 T-318
Carrier Transicold has identified a fully biodegradable and environmentally safe alkaline cleaning agent
(Tri−Pow’r® HD) for the unit. This will assist in helping to remove the corrosive fumigation chemicals and dislodg-
ing of the corrosive elements.
This cleaner is available from the Carrier Transicold Performance Parts Group (PPG) and can be ordered through
any of the PPG locations; Part Number NU4371−88.
As a general safety precaution, before using this product, refer to and retain the Material Safety Data (MSDS)
sheet. This document can be found at: www.nucalgon.com/products/coil_cleaners_tripower.htm
Prior to Cleaning:
• Always wear goggles, gloves and work boots.
• Avoid contact with skin and clothing, and avoid breathing mists.
• When mixing, add water to the sprayer first, then the cleaner.
• ALWAYS provide for proper ventilation when cleaning indoor evaporator coils (rear doors must be open).
• Be aware of surroundings − food, plants, etc., and the potential for human exposure.
• Always read directions and follow recommended dilution ratios. More is not always better. Using non−diluted
cleaner is not recommended.
Cleaning Procedure:
a. Remove the upper evaporator access panel inside of the unit.

b. Spray the surface with water before applying the cleaning solution. This helps the cleaner work better.
c. Liberally apply the prepared cleaner solution (5 parts water and 1 part cleaner).
d. Allow the cleaner to soak in for 5 to 7 minutes.
e. Assess area for rinsing. Follow all local regulations regarding disposal of waste water.
f. Thoroughly rinse the cleaner and surrounding area, floor, etc. When rinsing where heavy foaming solution is
present, it is very important to take the time to thoroughly rinse the equipment and surroundings.
g. Always rinse the empty coil cleaner bottle, cap tightly and dispose of properly.
7.19 Suction Modulation Valve

On start up of the unit, the SMV will reset to a known open position. This is accomplished by assuming the valve was
fully open, driving it fully closed, resetting the percentage open to zero, then opening to a known 21% staging position.
Figure 7.23 Suction Modulation Valve (SMV)
2-1/8 inch Nut
7.19.1 Pre-check Procedure

a. Check unit for abnormal operation.
b. Check charge. If refrigerant is low repair as required and again check operation.
c. If sufficient capacity cannot be maintained or unit is tripping excessively on high pressure switch (HPS) in
high ambients, check coils and clean if required.
T-318 7–26
d. If capacity or control cannot be maintained, turn unit OFF, then back ON. This will reset the SMV in the event
the controller lost communication with the valve, and may correct the problem.
NOTE
Carefully listen to the valve. During reset, the valve will make a ratcheting noise that may be heard or felt
as it is attempting to close. If this can be heard or felt, it indicates that the controller and drive module are
attempting to close the valve, and may serve as a quick indication that the drive module is in working order.
e. During the first few minutes of unit operation, compressor reliability enhancement logic (CREL) may be in
effect. This places the valve at a 21% staging position and is sufficient to drive the temperature of the supply
probe down several degrees during this interval.
f. After the CREL time-out has been met, the valve will start responding to the control logic and open or close rel-
ative to the demand. Scrutinize the unit operation for a few minutes. While in pulldown, the unit will open the
SMV to a maximum discharge pressure of 325 psig in high ambient conditions, or as much as the current set-
ting and control logic will allow. The current level should be high. A lower discharge pressure will be seen in
lower ambient temperatures. Once the unit has reached set point, the SMV will go into control mode. Both the
discharge/suction pressures, and current draw will go significantly lower. Once below set point, the suction
pressure should go into a vacuum within several minutes. Should the operation differ as mentioned, the SMV,
controller, or wiring, may be faulty.
g. Check for correct wire location at the stepper motor plug and the environmental connector (EC). Make sure
that the wires terminate in accordance with the wire markings (addresses).
h. Attach a manifold gauge set (refer to Section 7.2). If the unit is operating in the perishable mode, proceed to
step i. If the unit is operating in the frozen mode, proceed to step j.
i. Perishable operation: If the operation of the unit is in question, place the set point to approximately 6°C
(11°F) less than the current box temperature, so the unit goes into pulldown. Run the unit for approximately
one minute. Record readings on gauges and current draw. The current draw and pressures should go up.
Place set point 0.5°C (0.9°F) above current box temperature to fully modulate valve, and run for approxi-
mately one minute.
NOTE
The unit may shut off for a short time. Wait until the unit self starts and sufficient time has elapsed to
cause the valve to fully modulate.
Record new gauge readings and current draw. The suction pressure should go into a vacuum and the cur-
rent draw should have gone down. If little or no change to the suction pressure or current draw occurs, this
is an indication of a malfunctioning SMV.
j. Frozen operation: In frozen mode the valve tends to stay open as much as possible. Again, this is depen-
dent upon current limit setting and control logic. Turn the unit OFF and ON, as in the perishable mode, and
watch the gauges. The valve will run at 21% open if CREL logic is active, and will open to maximum allow-
able after this. Depending on ambient conditions, there should be an increase in suction pressure and cur-
rent draw as the valve opens. However, at times, this may be difficult to fully determine.
k. If the unit still does not operate properly, stop unit and proceed to the following step to check out the SMV system.
7.20 Valve Override Controls

Cd41 is a configurable function code that allows manual operation of the SMV valve for troubleshooting. Test
sequences are provided in Table 7–1.
PCnt (% Setting − SMV Capacity Modulation) allows opening of the SMV to various percentages.
The Override Timer (tIM) selection is provided to enter a time period of up to five minutes, during which the override is
active. If the timer is active, the valve override selection will take place immediately. If the timer is not active, changes
will not take place for a few seconds after the timer is started. When the timer times out, override function is automati-
cally terminated and the valve returns to normal machinery control. To operate the override, do the following:
a. Press the CODE SELECT key then press an ARROW key until Cd41 is displayed in the left window. The
right window will display a controller communications code.
b. Press the ENTER key. The left display will show a test name alternating with the test setting or time remaining.
Use an ARROW key to scroll to the desired test. Press the ENTER key and SELCt will appear in the left display.
7–27 T-318
c. Use an ARROW key to scroll to the desired setting, and then press the ENTER key. Selections are provided
in the following table.
d. If the timer is not operating, follow the above procedure to display the timer. Use an ARROW key to scroll to
the desired time interval and press ENTER to start the timer.
e. The above described sequence may be repeated during the timer cycle to change to another override.
Table 7–1 Valve Override Control Displays

Left Display Controller Communications Codes Setting Codes (Right Display)
(Right Display)
Cd 41/SELCt tIM 0 00 (0 minutes/0 Seconds)
(Override Timer) In 30 second increments to
5 00 (5 minutes/ 0 seconds)
PCnt AUtO
(% Setting − SMV Capacity Modulation) (Normal Machinery Control)
0
3
6
10
25
50
100
7.20.1 Checking the Stepper Valve
a. Checking with ohmmeter
Stop the unit, disconnect the 4-pin connector to the stepper SMV. With a reliable digital ohmmeter, check the wind-
ing resistance. In normal ambient, the valve should have 72 to 84 ohms measured on the red/green (a-b terminals)
and on the white/black (c-d terminals) leads. If an infinite or zero reading occurs, check connections and replace
the motor. If near normal or normal reading occurs, proceed to step 7.20.2 to check out the controller.
b. Checking with SMA-12 portable stepper drive tester
The SMA-12 portable stepper drive tester (Carrier Transicold P/N 07-00375-00) is a battery−operated stepper
drive that will open and close the SMV, allowing a more thorough check of the motor.
1. Stop the unit, disconnect the 4-pin connector from the stepper module to the valve (see Figure 7.23) and
attach the SMA-12 stepper drive to the connector going to the valve.
2. Set the SMA-12 pulse per second (PPS) to one PPS and either open or close valve. Each LED should light
sequentially until all four are lit. Any LED failing to light indicates an open on that leg, which indicates a poor
connection or an open coil. Repair or replace as required to achieve proper operation.
3. Restart unit, set the step rate to 200PPS on SMA-12 for the valve, and close stepper valve while watching the
suction gauge. Within one minute the suction pressure will go into a vacuum. This is an indication that the valve
is moving.
4. If no change in suction pressure is detected, check for resistance (refer to step 7.20.1), and check connec-
tions for proper continuity and retest. If the valve is functioning, and all connections and motor resistance
are good, check the drive module (refer to step 7.20.2).
5. If the valve is determined to be faulty after completing the above steps, perform a low side pump down.
Remove valve powerhead assembly, and replace with a NEW valve powerhead assembly, torque nut to
35ft-lb, evacuate low side, and open all service valves.
! CAUTION
DO NOT disassemble piston from NEW suction modulating valve powerhead assembly. Doing
so may result in damage to piston.
7.20.2 Checking the Controller

a. Turn unit OFF.
T-318 7–28
b. With voltmeter set to read 20 volts DC, attach the positive lead to MC1 of the 4-pin connector and the negative
lead to the TP9. Turn ON unit and watch the volt meter. After a short delay, the reading should remain
unchanged at 0 volts. If 5VDC, make sure the jumper wire from MC1 to MC8 is in place; if not, install and retest.
7.20.3 SMV Emergency Repair Procedure

In the event of an SMV failure, and replacement components are not readily available, the system can be
bypassed by removing the SMV valve piston. To remove the piston, do the following:
a. Perform a low side pump down (refer to Section 7.4).

b. Remove SMV powerhead by loosening the 2-1/8 inch diameter nut (see Figure 7.23) to relieve any pressure
and then sliding the powerhead out.
c. Remove the piston by loosening the Allen screw and removing the piston and screw.
d. Install the powerhead assembly (without the piston) and torque to 35 to 40ft-lbs.
e. Open all valves.
f. Start the unit.
g. Adjust the suction service valve so that the approximate temperature OR current limit is maintained. For per-
ishable loads, it is recommended that the adjustment be made so that the available capacity is slightly larger
than the load. The unit will cycle OFF and ON.
h. Once repair parts become available, repair as required.
7.21 DPRV Check Procedure

The discharge pressure regulating valve (DPRV) is designed to maintain a minimal level of discharge pressure
within the compressor. Refer to Section 3.2 for valve setting.
The following procedure can be used to perform a functional check:
a. Install a high pressure gauge at the discharge service valve.
b. Install another high pressure gauge at the liquid line service valve.
c. Run unit with -18°C (0°F) set point.
d. After five minutes, read both gauges and subtract the liquid line pressure from the discharge pressure. This
is the actual differential pressure.
e. Using the ambient temperature and the chart below, determine the replacement differential pressure.
Figure 7.24 DPRV Replacement Value Chart
70
Pressure (psi)
60 REPLACE DPRV
50
40
Replacement Differential
30
20 DO NOT REPLACE DPRV
10
0
30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
Ambient Temperature (F)
1. This test should not be run below -1.1°C (30°F) or above 49°C (120°F). If the actual differential pressure is
close to the replacement differential pressure, it is recommended that the readings be taken several times at
two minutes intervals.
2. If valve cap is found to be leaking it may be replaced using cap & O-ring (Carrier P/N 40-50024-00).
7–29 T-318
7.22 Autotransformer
If the unit does not start, check the following:
a. Make sure the 460VAC (yellow) power cable is plugged into the receptacle (item 3, Figure 5.1) and locked
in place.
b. Make sure circuit breakers CB-1 and CB-2 are in the “ON” position. If the circuit breakers do not hold in,
check voltage supply.
c. There is no internal protector for this transformer design; therefore, no checking of the internal protector is
required.
d. Using a voltmeter and with the primary supply circuit ON, check the primary (input) voltage (460VAC). Next,
check the secondary (output) voltage (230VAC). The transformer is defective if output voltage is not available.
7.23 Controller
7.23.1 Handling Controller
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
Unplug all controller connectors before performing arc welding on any part of the container.
The guidelines and cautions provided herein should be followed when handling the Controller/DataCORDER mod-
ule. These precautions and procedures should be implemented when replacing the module, when doing any arc
welding on the unit, or when service to the refrigeration unit requires handling and removal of the controller.
a. Obtain a grounding wrist strap (Carrier Transicold P/N 07-00304-00) and a static dissipation mat (Carrier
Transicold P/N 07-00304-00). The wrist strap, when properly grounded, will dissipate any potential electro-
static buildup on the body. The dissipation mat will provide a static-free work surface on which to place and/
or service the controller.
b. Disconnect and secure power to the unit.
c. Place strap on wrist and attach the ground end to any exposed unpainted metal area on the refrigeration
unit frame (bolts, screws, etc.).
d. Carefully remove the controller, refer to Section 7.23.4. Do not touch any of the electrical connections if
possible. Place the module on the static mat.
e. The strap should be worn during any service work on the controller, even when it is placed on the mat.
7.23.2 Controller Troubleshooting
A group of test points (TP) (see Figure 7.25) are provided on the controller for troubleshooting electrical circuits
(see schematic diagram, Section 8). A description of the test points follows:
NOTE
Use a digital voltmeter to measure AC voltage between TPs and ground (TP9), except for TP8.
TP 1 − NA
TP 2 − This test point enables the user to check if the internal protector for the compressor motor (IP-CP) or high
pressure switch is open.
TP 3 − This test point enables the user to check if the water pressure switch (WP) contact is open or closed.
TP 4 − This test point enables the user to check if the internal protector for the condenser fan motor (IP-CM) is
open or closed.
T-318 7–30
TP 5 − This test point enables the user to check if the internal protectors for the evaporator fan motors (IP-EM1 or
IP-EM2) are open or closed.
TP 6 − This test point enables the user to check if the controller water tank heater relay (TQ) is open or closed.
TP 7 − This test point is not used in this application.
TP 8 − This test point is not applicable to the units covered herein.
TP 9 − This test point is the chassis (unit frame) ground connection.
TP 10 − This test point enables the user to check if the heat termination thermostat (HTT) contact is open or
closed.
Figure 7.25 Controller Section of the Control Box
2 3 4
1
1. Controller Software Programming Port 3. Controller

2. Mounting Screw 4. Test Points
-----
7.23.3 Controller Programming Procedure
To load new software into the module, the programming card (PCMIA) is inserted into the programming/ software port.
! CAUTION
The unit must be OFF whenever a programming card is inserted or removed from the controller
programming port.
Loading operational software:
1. Turn unit OFF via start-stop switch (ST).

2. Insert software/programming card containing the following (example) files into the programming/software
port (see Figure 7.25):
menuDDMM.ml3 − This file allows the user to select a file/program to upload into the controller.
cfYYMMDD.ml3 − Multi-configuration file.
3. Turn unit ON via start-stop switch (ST).
4. The display module will display the message ruN COnFG. If a defective card is being used, the display will blink
the message “bAd CArd.” Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.
5. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display reads, LOAd 51XX for Recip.
7–31 T-318
6. Press the ENTER key on the keypad. The display will alternate to between PrESS EntR and rEV XXXX.
7. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
8. The display will show the message “Pro SoFt”. This message will last for up to one minute.
10. The display module will go blank briefly, then read “Pro donE” when the software is loaded. If a problem
occurs while loading the software, the display will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V.” Turn start-stop
switch OFF and remove the card.
11. Turn unit OFF via start-stop switch (ST).
12. Remove the programming card from the programming/ software port and return the unit to normal operation
by placing the start-stop switch in the ON position.
13. Turn power on and wait 15 seconds. The status LED will flash quickly and there will be no display. The con-
troller is loading the new software into memory. This takes about 15 seconds.
When complete the controller will reset and power up normally.
14. Wait for default display − setpoint on the left and control temperature on the right.
15. Confirm software is correct using keypad code select 18 to view Cd18 XXXX.
16. Turn power off. Operational software is loaded.
Loading configuration software:
1. Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST).

2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card containing the following (example) files into the programming/
software port (see Figure 7.25):
menuDDMM.ml3 − This file allows the user to select the file/program to upload into the controller.
cfYYMMDD.ml3 − Multi-configuration file.
recp54XX.ml3 − Controller software program for recip units.
3. Turn unit ON using start-stop switch (ST).
4. The display module will display the message ruN COnFG. If a defective card is being used, the display will
blink the message “bAd CArd.” Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.
6. The display module will go blank briefly and then display “541 00.” Based on the operational software installed.
7. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to scroll through the list to obtain the proper model dash number. (If a
defective card is being used, the display will blink the message “bAd CArd.” Turn start-stop switch OFF and
remove the card.)
9. When the software loading has successfully completed, the display will show the message “EEPrM donE.”
(If a problem occurs while loading the software, the display will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V.”
Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.)
10. Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST).
11. Remove the programming card from the programming/ software port and return the unit to normal operation
by placing the start-stop switch in the ON position.
12. Confirm correct model configuration using the keypad to choose code select 20 (CD20). The model dis-
played should match the unit serial number plate.
7.23.4 Removing and Installing the Controller

a. Removal:
1. Disconnect all front wire harness connectors and move wiring out of way.
2. The lower controller mounting is slotted. Loosen the top mounting screw (see Figure 7.25) and lift up and out.
3. Disconnect the two back connectors (EC) and remove module.
T-318 7–32
4. When removing the replacement controller from its packaging, note how it is packaged. When returning the
old controller for service, place it in the packaging in the same manner as the replacement. The packaging
has been designed to protect the controller from both physical and electrostatic discharge damage during
storage and transit.
b. Installation:
Install the module by reversing the removal steps.
Torque values for mounting screws (item 2, see Figure 7.25) are 0.23mkg (20 inch-pounds). Torque value for the
connectors is 0.12mkg (10 inch-pounds).
7.23.5 Battery Replacement

Standard Battery Location (Standard Cells):
a. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
b. Slide bracket out and remove old batteries. (See Figure 4.4, Item 8.)
c. Install new batteries and slide bracket into control box slot.
! CAUTION
Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid nicking or cutting wires.
Standard Battery Location (Rechargeable Cells):
b. Disconnect battery wire connector from control box.
c. Slide out and remove old battery and bracket. (See Figure 4.4, Item 8.)
d. Slide new battery pack and bracket into the control box slot.
e. Reconnect battery wire connector to control box and replace wire ties that were removed.
Secure Battery Option (Rechargeable Cells Only):
b. Open control box door and remove both the high voltage shield and clear plastic rain shield (if installed).
c. Disconnect the battery wires from the “KA” plug positions 14, 13, 11.
d. Using Driver Bit, Carrier Transicold part number 07−00418−00, remove the 4 screws securing the display module
to the control box. Disconnect the ribbon cable and set the display module aside.
NOTE
The battery wires must face toward the right.
e. Remove the old battery from the bracket and clean bracket surface. Remove the protective backing from the
new battery and assemble to the bracket. Secure battery by inserting the wire tie from the back of the
bracket around the battery, and back through the bracket.
f. Reconnect the ribbon cable to display and re−install the display.
g. Route the battery wires from the battery along the display harness and connect the red battery wire and one
end of the red jumper to “KA14,” the other end of the red jumper wire to “KA11,” and the black wire to “KA13.”
h. Replace wire ties that were removed.
7.24 Temperature Sensor Service

Service procedures for service of the return recorder, return temperature, supply recorder, supply temperature,
ambient, defrost temperature, compressor discharge and compressor suction temperature sensors are provided in
the following sub paragraphs.
7–33 T-318
7.24.1 Sensor Checkout Procedure
To verify that accuracy of a temperature sensor:
a. Remove the sensor from the bracket and place in a 0°C (32°F) ice-water bath. The ice-water bath is pre-
pared by filling an insulated container (of sufficient size to completely immerse bulb) with ice cubes or
chipped ice, then filling voids between ice with water and agitating until mixture reaches 0°C (32°F) mea-
sured on a laboratory thermometer.
b. Start unit and check sensor reading on the control panel. The reading should be 0°C (32°F). If the reading is
correct, reinstall sensor; if it is not, continue with the following:
c. Turn unit OFF and disconnect power supply.
d. Refer to Section 7.23 and remove controller to gain access to the sensor plugs.
e. Using the plug connector marked “EC,” that is connected to the back of the controller, locate the sensor
wires (RRS, RTS, SRS, STS, AMBS, DTS, CPDS OR CPSS as required). Follow those wires to the connec-
tor and using the pins of the plug, measure the resistance. Values are provided in Table 7–2.
Table 7–2 Sensor Temperature/Resistance Chart

Temperature Centigrade Temperature Fahrenheit Resistance (Ohms)
RRS, RTS, SRS and STS
0 32 32,650 +/−91
25 77 10,000 +/−50
AMBS and DTS
0 32 32,650 +1720 -1620
25 77 10,000 +450 -430
Due to the variations and inaccuracies in ohmmeters, thermometers, or other test equipment, a reading
within 2% of the chart value would indicate a good sensor. If a sensor is defective, the resistance reading will
usually be much higher or lower than the resistance values given.
7.24.2 Sensor Replacement

b. For two wire sensors, cut cable 5cm (2 inches) from shoulder of defective sensor and discard the defective
sensor only. For 3-wire sensors, cut at 23cm (9 inches). Slide the cap and grommet off well mounted sensor
and save for possible reuse. Do not cut the grommet.
c. If required, prepare the replacement sensor by cutting sensor wire(s) back 40mm (1-1/2 inch). For 3-wire
sensors, the black wire should be cut at the middle length and the red/white wire cut to the shorter length
(See Figure 7.26).
Figure 7.26 Sensor Types
Sensor
40 mm (1 1/2 inch)
Mounting Stud Type
6.3 mm (1/4 inch)
40 mm (1-1/2 inches)
Sensor 6.3 mm (1/4 inch)
Bulb Type
T-318 7–34
d. Prepare the cables by cutting wires to the opposite of the sensor (See Figure 7.27).
When installing a single wire color two wire sensor, cut one wire of existing two wire cable 40mm (1-1/2 inch)
shorter than the other wire.
When replacing two single sensors with a combination (3-wire) sensor, the black wires of the cables should
be cut to the same length and the red wire of one cable cut to the shorter length.
When replacing a original 3-wire sensor, cut the black wire to the middle length and the red wire to the
shorter length.
e. Strip back insulation on all wiring 6.3mm (1/4 inch).
f. Slide a large piece of heat shrink tubing over the cable, and place small pieces of heat shrink tubing, one
over each wire, before adding crimp fittings as shown in Figure 7.27.
g. If required, slide the cap and grommet assembly onto the replacement sensor. If the replacement sensor is
of a larger diameter than the original, a different grommet may be required.
h. Slip crimp fittings over dressed wires (keeping wire colors together). Make sure wires are pushed into crimp
fittings as far as possible and crimp with crimping tool.
i. Solder spliced wires with a 60% tin and 40% lead Rosincore solder.
j. Slide heat shrink tubing over splice so that ends of tubing cover both ends of crimp as shown in Figure 7.27.
k. Heat tubing to shrink over splice. Make sure all seams are sealed tightly against the wiring to prevent mois-
ture seepage.
l. Slide large heat shrink tubing over both splices and shrink.
! CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice area as this may affect sensor resistance.
m. Reinstall sensor, refer to Section 7.24.3.
NOTE
The P5 Pre-Trip test must be run to inactivate probe alarms (refer to Section 5.9).
Figure 7.27 Sensor and Cable Splice
REPLACEMENT 2 WIRE TO 2 WIRE OR 3 WIRE TO 3 WIRE

Cable
Sensor
REPLACEMENT FOR DUAL, SINGLE SENSOR CONFIGURATION
Cables
RED
BLACK
Sensor
Heat Shrink Tubing Large Heat Shrink Tubing RED/WHITE
7.24.3 Sensor Re-Installation
a. Sensors STS/SRS
To properly position a supply sensor, the sensor must be fully inserted into the probe holder. This positioning will
give the sensor the optimum amount of exposure to the supply air stream, and will allow the Controller to operate
correctly. Insufficient probe insertion into the probe holder will result in poor temperature control due to the lack of
air flow over the sensor.
It is also necessary to ensure that the probe tip does not contact the evaporator back panel. The design minimum
clearance of 6mm (1/4 inch) should be maintained (see Figure 7.28).
7–35 T-318
b. Sensor RTS/RRS
Reinstall the return sensor as shown in Figure 7.29. For proper placement of the return sensor, be sure to position
the seal section of the sensor against the side of the mounting clamp.
c. Sensor DTS
The DTS sensor must have insulating material placed completely over the sensor to insure the coil metal tempera-
ture is sensed.
Figure 7.28 Supply Sensor Positioning
Sensor Wires Cap and Grommet Assembly
Evaporator Back Panel

Probe Holder
Supply
Air
Stream
Supply Sensor 6 mm
(1/4 inch)
Figure 7.29 Return Sensor Positioning
Evaporator Grille
Combination Sensor
(Mount in Either Clamp)
Seal Mounting Clamp
7.25 Vent Position Sensor (VPS)

The vent position sensor (VPS) determines the position of the fresh air vent in near real-time via the Cd45.
The fresh air VPS alarm (AL50) will occur if the sensor reading is not stable for five minutes or if the sensor is out-
side of its valid range (shorted or open). This can occur if the vent is loose or the panel is defective. To confirm a
defective panel, assure that the wing nut is secure and then power cycle the unit.
The alarm should immediately go inactive. Check the four-minute stability requirement. If the alarm reoccurs after
the four minutes and the panel was known to have been stable, then the panel should be replaced.
If the alarm immediately reappears as active, the panel should be replaced.
Upper VPS:
In order to replace the VPS, the panel must be removed and replaced with another upper fresh air panel equipped
with VPS.
T-318 7–36
Upon installation, a new VPS assembly requires calibration as follows:
1. Rotate the vent to the 0CMH/CFM position.
2. Code select Cd45 will automatically be displayed. Press the Enter key and hold for five seconds.
3. After the enter key has been pressed, the display will read CAL (for calibration).
4. Press the ALT MODE key and hold for five seconds.
5. After the calibration has been completed, Cd45 will display 0 CMH/CFM.
Lower VPS:
1. Remove Condenser fan guard.
2. If unit is equipped with Partlow recorder, remove four Partlow box assembly mounting bolts and pull Partlow
box assembly away from unit.
If unit is not equipped with Partlow remove left hand access panel to obtain clearance behind fresh air make-
up assembly.
3. Remove the two nuts and two washers that hold the slide assembly on. These threads are staked the nuts
will be cutting threads during removal.
4. Remove slide assembly.
5. The VPS bracket may be riveted in place. If that’s the case, drill out rivet heads. If bracket is bolted, remove
bolts, washers, and nuts.
6. Note position of wire ties and wire routing for new sensor installation.
7. Remove sensor and bracket assembly from the backside of fresh air make-up.
8. Insert new sensor assembly through clearance hole where the old sensor was removed and route wire har-
ness as noted in step 7.
9. Mount bracket to unit using bolts, washers, and nuts.
10. Wire tie wire harness in locations noted in step 7.
11. Calibrate sensor:
a. Use a multi-meter set to 200k ohms. Connect lead to VPS connector.
b. Turn the gear wheel on the motor all the way to the right (clockwise) until it stops.
c. Adjust the gear wheel counter clockwise until the meter reads 6.5k ohms (approximately).
d. Install the VPS slide door so that the door is flush against the bottom rail, the motor gear and the door
teeth are meshed, and the gear wheel does not move from the set position
12. Position slide assembly back on to studs and reinstall two washers and two nuts that secure slide assembly.
13. Stake the ends of the two studs on panel assembly with wire cutters so that nuts will not be easily removed.
14. Reinstall Partlow box assembly if equipped, or access panel.
15. Reinstall condenser fan guard.
7.26 eAutoFresh Service

7.26.1 Servicing the eAutoFresh Air Filter
Removing the Air Sample Filter Element
The air sample filter element can be accessed in two ways:
1. Through the eAutoFresh side evaporator access panel (see Figure 3.2).
2. Through the inside of the container by lowering the upper evaporator panel.
7–37 T-318
a. By hand, unscrew and remove the filter cup from the bottom of the air sample filter assembly.
b. Remove the filter element from the filter assembly.
c. Install the new air sample filter element by reversing the above steps.
7.26.2 Checking eAutoFresh Drive System

Checking the Auto Slide:
a. To check with an ohmmeter, disconnect the four pin connector to the stepper motor. With a reliable digital
ohmmeter, check the winding resistance. In normal ambient, the motor should have 72 to 84 ohms mea-
sured on the red/green (a−b terminals) and on the white/black (c−d terminals) leads. If an infinite or zero
reading occurs, check connections or replace the motor. If near normal or normal reading occurs, proceed
to Checking the Controller.
b. To check with a SMA−12 portable stepper drive tester. The SMA−12 portable stepper drive tester (Carrier
Transicold P/N 07−00375−00) is a battery operated stepper drive which will open and close the auto slide,
which allows a more thorough check of the motor.
Checking the Slide Motor:

a. Turn unit OFF.
b. Disconnect the four pin connector from the Stepper Drive to the Stepper Motor, (see Figure 7.23).
c. Attach the SMA−12 portable stepper drive tester to the Stepper Motor.
Figure 7.30 Stepper Components
Stepper Drive (SD) Stepper Motor (AF)
d. Set the SMA−12 pulse per second (PPS) to one PPS and press button to open or close the valve. Each LED
should light sequentially until all four are lit. If an LED fails to light, it indicates an open on that leg caused by
a poor connection or an open coil. Repair or replace as required to achieve proper operation.
e. Set the SMA−12 step rate to 200 PPS. Press open or close while watching the slide mechanism for move-
ment, this is an indication that the motor is working.
f. If the slide moves using the SMA−12, but fails to move when connected in the unit (refer to “Checking the Drive
Module” in the section that follows.)
Checking the Drive Module:
a. Turn unit OFF.
b. Disconnect the four pin connector to the Stepper Motor.
c. With a voltmeter set to read 24 volts AC, attach the positive lead to the drive module outlet pin A (wire 1A) of
the four pin connector and the negative lead to the B pin (wire 1B).
d. Turn ON unit, and watch the volt meter. After a short delay, the reading should rise to approximately 12 volts.
e. Repeat for pins C and D (wires 2A and 2B).
f. If only one set of pins reads a voltage, check connections and retest.
g. If the retest reads out the same, the drive module or controller is faulty.
h. If no voltage is present in any step, the output from the controller to the drive module may be faulty. Check
the connections and wires from the controller to the drive module.
i. To replace the drive module, disconnect all connectors, unscrew from mounting, and replace with a NEW
drive module in reverse order.
T-318 7–38
Checking the Controller:
a. Turn the unit OFF.
b. Disconnect the six pin connector to the stepper drive from the controller.
c. With a voltmeter set to read 50 volts DC, attach the positive lead to outlet pin A of the six pin connector, and
the negative lead to pin B or TP−9 of the controller.
d. Turn ON the unit for 40 seconds, and watch the voltmeter. There should be approximately 24 to 32 VDC
shown on pin A.
e. There should be zero volts on pin B.
f. After a short delay, the reading should rise to approximately 24 to 32 VDC on pin E.
g. Pins C and D will have zero to 5 volts transistor logic (TTL) signals present, however, this can only be
checked with the connector assembled as this is an open collector type circuit.
Checking the outputs on A, B and E will verify that the controller is supplying power to the drive module. To be thor-
ough, and if it is desired, the signals on pins C and D can be checked as follows:
h. Install a jumper assembly (Carrier part number 07−00408−00) to connect the drive module and controller
connectors as shown in Figure 7.31.
i. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to test connector socket C and negative lead to socket B, and run
as before by resetting unit.
j. Repeat for sockets D and B.
Figure 7.31 Jumper Assembly
Controller Drive Module

Connector (EC) Connector (SD)
A
B
C A
D B
E C
D
E
Test
Connector Jumper
There should be approximately five volts DC on sockets “C” and “D” (S1 and S2) when measured as above. If not
the connections or controller is faulty. If any of these pins are not consistent, the connections or the controller is
suspect. Check and replace as required.
7.26.3 Servicing the eAutoFresh Drive System

To replace the Drive Motor Assembly:
a. Remove the bolts that secure the eAutoFresh Panel (3, Figure 7.32) to the front of the unit. Reach in, cut tie
wrap, (2) and disconnect the motor connector (1). Bring panel to work area.
b. Remove four screws (8) fastening the grille (7).
c. Remove six screws (9) fastening the rails (5 and 11), the slide plate (10) and the gasket plate (6). Set com-
ponents aside for reassembly.
d. Remove the four screws (12) fastening the motor cup (4) to the panel. Cut sealer on outside and inside of
motor cup assembly. Push out the motor cup assembly from the rear of the panel.
e. Mount the replacement motor cup assembly in the panel using original screws. Torque screws to 0.29 mkg
(25 +/− 1 Inch pounds).
f. Reapply sealer to the inside and the outside of the motor cup assembly.
7–39 T-318
g. Mount the upper & lower rails, slide plate and gasket plate using original hardware. Apply thread sealant
and torque screws to 0.29 mkg (25 +/− 1 Inch pounds).
h. Mount grille assembly using original hardware. Apply thread sealant and torque screws to 0.29 mkg (25 +/−
1 Inch pounds).
i. Reconnect the motor connector.
j. Replace the bolts that secure the eAutoFresh Panel to the front of the unit.
k. Carry out functional test. Refer to Section 5.4.3 step c.
Figure 7.32 Motor Cup Replacement
1 2
3 5 8
6 7
12
1
11 10 9
1. Connector 7. Grille
2. Tie Wrap 8. Grill Screws
3. eAutoFresh Panel 9. Rail Screws
4. Cup, Motor 10. Plate, Slide
5. Rail, Top 11. Rail, Bottom
6. Plate, Gasket 12. Motor Cup Screws
-----
T-318 7–40
7.27 Electronic PARTLOW Temperature Recorder
The microprocessor based temperature recorder is designed to interface with the DataCORDER to log tempera-
ture with time. The electronic recorder will automatically record the return air, supply air, or both, based on the set-
ting of temperature controller configuration code CnF37, refer to Table 4–4. The recorder reads and records data
from the Controller in present time, under normal operating conditions.
If using the Electronic Partlow Recorder CTD P/N 12-00464-xx Where xx= an odd number (example: 12-
00464-03)
The recorder will STOP when the power is OFF, and the pen tip will remain at the last recorded temperature on the
chart. When power is applied, and the power off period is less than thirty days; the pen tip will move to 25°C (77°F),
the chart will advance to present time, and the pen tip will move to the currently recorded temperature.
If the power has been OFF for more than thirty days, the recorder will NOT re-synchronize (the chart will not
advance to present time), the pen tip will move to the currently recorded temperature, and the recorder will resume
normal temperature recording.
If using the Electronic Partlow Recorder CTD P/N 12-00464-xx where xx= an even number (example: 12-
00464-06)
The recorder will STOP when the power is OFF, and the pen tip will remain at the last recorded temperature on the
chart. When power is applied and the power off period is less than thirty days, the recorder will retrieve the logged
data from the DataCORDER for the power off period and record it onto the chart. Thereafter, the recorder will
resume normal temperature recording.
If the optional DataCORDER battery pack is being used and the charge is too low to enable recording during the
power off period of less than thirty days, the pen tip will move to below the inner chart ring for the period when NO
data was recorded by the DataCORDER.
If the power has been OFF for more than thirty days, the recorder will NOT re-synchronize (the chart will not
advance to present time), the pen tip will move to the currently recorded temperature, and the recorder will resume
normal temperature recording.
7.27.1 Replacing the Recorder

a. Turn power to the unit OFF.
b. Open the recorder door (see Table 7.33, item 1).
c. Locate the connector below the recorder, and squeeze the ears together to disconnect the plug (item 6).
d. Remove the four mounting screws (item 8) and remove the recorder.
e. Install the new recorder by reversing the above steps.
7.27.2 Changing the Chart
NOTE
To prevent recorder corrosion, it is important to assure the door is securely closed at all times after
completing the chart change.
a. Lift the stylus (item 5, Table 7.33) by grasping the arm near the base, and pulling the arm away from the
chart until it snaps into its retracted position.
b. Remove the chart retaining nut (item 10), remove the used chart, and record today’s date on the old chart.
c. Press the “Change Chart” button (item 2).
NOTE
Failure to press the change chart button when changing a chart with the power OFF may result in the
chart advancing when power is applied.
d. Install a new chart. Make sure the chart center hole is placed over the center hub and the chart edges are
behind the four hold down tabs (item 9).
e. Mark today’s date, container number, and other required information on the new chart and install under hold
down tabs.
7–41 T-318
f. Replace the chart nut loosely. Rotate the chart until the correct day is aligned with the “start arrow” and hand
tighten the chart nut.
g. Gently lower the stylus arm until the pen tip (item 4) comes in contact with the chart.
! CAUTION
Do not allow the recorder stylus to snapback down. The stylus arm base is spring loaded, and
damage may occur to the chart, or the stylus force may be altered.
DO NOT move the stylus arm up and down on the chart face. This will result in damage to the
stylus motor gear.
Figure 7.33 Electronic Partlow Temperature Recorder
3
2
1
10 5
8
7
1. Recorder Door 6. Connector

2. Change Chart Button 7. Calibration Button (Located underneath)
3. Recorder Box 8. Mounting Screws, #10-24 x 7/16 inches long
4. Pen Tip 9. Hold Down Tab
5. Stylus Arm 10. Chart Retaining Nut
-----
7.27.3 Adjusting the Recorder Stylus

Proper stylus force upon the chart paper is important. Factory adjustment is 113 to 127 grams (4 to 4.5 ounces). To
measure the force, use a spring type gauge and attach it under the stylus as close as possible to the pen tip (Fig-
ure 7.33 item 4). Exert pull on the gauge perpendicular to the chart surface. The measured force should be noted
just as the pen tip leaves the surface.
T-318 7–42
NOTE
The two coil springs near the base of the stylus are NOT involved in establishing chart contact force.
They serve only to hold the stylus in its retracted position.
Correct adjustment is made by carefully bending the portion of the stylus arm between the bend near the pen tip
and the first bend towards the stylus arm base. If the force is too low, the stylus trace will be light and difficult to
read. If the force is too great, wrinkling or tearing of the paper chart may occur.
7.27.4 Re-zeroing the Recording Thermometer

For Electronic Partlow Recorder CTD P/N 12-00464-xx
Where xx= an even number (example: 12-00464-06)
NOTE
Use chart CTD P/N 09-00128-00 (°F) P/N 09-00128-01 (°C).
a. Press the “Calibration” button (item 7, Figure 7.33) on the bottom of the recorder. The pen tip will drive fully
down scale, then move upscale to the chart ring at 0°C (32°F), and stop.
b. If the tip of the pen (item 4) is on the 0°C (32F) chart ring the recorder is in calibration, proceed to step c. If
the tip of the pen is NOT on the 0°C (32°F) chart ring, the operator must loosen the two screws on the bot-
tom of the stylus arm to adjust the pen tip manually to the 0°C (32°F) chart ring. Tighten the screws when
adjustment is complete.
c. Press the calibration button and the pen will position itself to the correct temperature reading.
7.27.5 Re-zeroing the Recording Thermometer

For Electronic Partlow Recorder CTD P/N 12-00464-xx
Where xx= an odd number (example: 12-00464-03)
NOTE
Use chart CTD P/N 09-00128-00 (°F) P/N 09-00128-01 (°C).
a. Press the “Calibration” button (item 7, Figure 7.33) on the bottom of the recorder. The pen tip will drive fully
down scale, then move upscale to the chart ring at -29°C (-20°F), and stop.
b. If the tip of the pen (item 4) is on the -29°C (-20°F) chart ring the recorder is in calibration, proceed to step c.
If the tip of the pen is NOT on the -29°C (-20°F) chart ring, the operator must loosen the two screws on the
bottom of the stylus arm to adjust the pen tip manually to the -29°C (-20°F) chart ring. Tighten the screws
when adjustment is complete.
c. Press the calibration button and the pen will position itself to the correct temperature reading.
7.28 Maintenance of Painted Surfaces

The refrigeration unit is protected by a special paint system against the corrosive atmosphere in which it normally
operates. However, should the paint system be damaged, the base metal can corrode. In order to protect the refrig-
eration unit from the highly corrosive sea atmosphere or if the protective paint system is scratched or damaged,
clean area to bare metal using a wire brush, emery paper, or equivalent cleaning method. Immediately following
cleaning, spray or brush on zinc-rich primer. After the primer has dried, spray or brush on finish coat of paint to
match original unit color.
7.29 Composite Control Box Repairs

7.29.1 Introduction
This procedure provides instructions for repair of the Carrier Transicold composite control box. Damage to the con-
trol box may be in the form of a chip or hole, a crack, a damaged thread insert or damage to the door hinge inserts.
Generally, the object of the repair must be to ensure sufficient strength is restored to the damaged area and the
repair must keep the box water tight. Information on repair kits and repair procedures for each type of damage is
provided in the following paragraphs. Ambient temperature must be above 7°C, (45°F) for proper curing of epoxy
repairs.
7–43 T-318
7.29.2 Cracks
Cracks in the control box are repaired using a fiberglass patch over the damaged area. Materials required are
included in the Fiberglass Patch Kit supplied with Crack Repair Kit, Carrier Transicold part number 76-00724-00SV
(see Table 7–3).
a. The surface must be clean and dry. Roughen the surface with sandpaper to ensure a good bond.
b. Cut the fiberglass cloth to allow a 25mm (1 inch) overlap around the area to be repaired.
c. Stretch and position the cloth over the area to be repaired and secure it with masking tape.
d. Make up sufficient epoxy glue to cover the cloth by mixing equal parts of resin and hardener. Saturate the
cloth with the epoxy glue, spreading evenly. 6-31 T-318
e. Remove the tape and overlap the edge of the cloth approximately 6 to 12mm (1/4” to 1/2”) with glue.
f. Epoxy will dry in 45-60 minutes. When completely cured (12 hours), use sandpaper to smooth edges of the
patch.
7.29.3 Chips and Holes

Chips and holes in the control box are repaired using a piece of aluminum or stainless steel to cover the damaged
area. The material can be cut to suit and riveted in place. An adhesive sealant must be used to make the repair
watertight. The adhesive sealant (Sikaflex 221) is included in Crack Repair Kit Carrier Transicold part number 76-
00724-00SV (see Table 7–3). Do not use an acetone based silicone sealant, which can be identified by a vine-
gar-like odor.
a. To make up the patch, cut a piece of aluminum or stainless steel so that it will overlap the damaged area by
at least 40mm (1-1/2”) on all sides.
b. Choose rivet locations and drill the rivet holes in the corresponding locations on the control box and patch
piece.
c. Apply the adhesive sealant around the damaged area to form a seal between the control box and the patch
piece.
d. Rivet the patch piece in place.
e. File smooth any rough edges (including rivets) that may come into contact with wires.
7.29.4 Inserts
The threaded brass inserts that are molded into the control box will need to be replaced if the threads become
stripped or if the insert becomes loose. The inserts and epoxy are contained in repair kit, Carrier Transicold part
number 76-50084-00 (see Table 7–4). There are 6 different inserts used in the control box. Refer to Figure 6-35 for
the locations of the various inserts.
NOTE
An epoxy application gun is also needed, Carrier Transicold part number 07-00391-00.
The damaged insert must be removed from the control box. Table 7–5 identifies the drill size and drill depth to be
used for each insert. A stop ring should be used on the drill bit to limit the depth.
a. Center the drill bit on the insert and drill to the prescribed depth.
b. Remove the chips from the drilled hole.
T-318 7–44
Figure 7.34 Door Hinge Repair
c. Mix the two component epoxy and fill the hole halfway to the top with epoxy.
d. Press the insert in until it is flush with the surface.
e. Wipe away any excess epoxy. The part is ready for service after the bond material has hardened and is tack
free (approximately 20 minutes).
7.29.5 Hinge Inserts

If the door hinges have been pulled from the control box, drill and reinstall the hinge as shown in Table 7.34 and
described in the following steps:
Materials needed:
1. Cut two square pieces of 3mm thick (1/8 inch) aluminum or stainless steel approximately 40mm (1 5/8”)
square. These squares will serve as backing plates.
2. Two nuts, bolts (10-24 x 1”) and washers for each insert that needs repair.
a. Drill a 1/4” hole in the center of each square backing plate.
b. Pass the bolts through the bolts holes in the door hinge, then through the control box at the location where
the hinge insert pulled out.
c. From inside the control box, slide the backing plates over the bolts and secure in place with the washers and nuts.
Table 7–3 Crack, Chip & Hole Repair Kit

Item Description Part Number Qty
1 Crack Repair Kit - Includes 76-00724-00SV 1
2 . . . Fiberglass Patch Kit (Loctite FK-98 or 80265) 76-00724-00Z 10
3 . . . Sikaflex 221 Adhesive Sealant (Sikaflex 232-361) 02-00067-02Z 10
4 . . . Instruction Sheet 98-02339-00 10
7–45 T-318
Table 7–4 insert Repair Kit
Item Description Part Number Qty
1 Insert Repair Kit - Includes 76-50084-00 1
2 . . . Insert - 17.53 x 9.91mm (.690 x .390in) 1/4-20 Threads 34-06231-01 10
3 . . . Insert - 15.88 x 6.35mm (.625 x .250in) 10-24 Threads 34-06231-03 10
6 . . . Insert - 12.7 x 9.91mm (.5 x .390in) 1/4-20 Threads 34-06231-06 10
8 . . . Durabond Epoxy E20-HP (Loctite 29314) 02-00082-00 1
9 . . . Static Mixing Tube (Loctite 983440) 07-00390-00 1
10 . . . Instruction Sheet 98-02338-00 1
NOTE
Insert repair procedures require use of an Application Gun,
Carrier part number 07-00391-00 (Loctite 983435).
Table 7–5 Drill Information

Item Insert Part Number Drill Size and Depth
1 34- 06231- 01 10.3mm x 17.8mm deep (.404in. x .700in. deep)
2 34- 06231- 03 6.8mm x 16.3mm deep (.266in. x .640in. deep)
3 34- 06231- 04 7.9mm x 25.4mm deep (.3125in. x 1.0in. deep)
4 34- 06231- 05 6.9mm (.270in.) Drill completely through.
T-318 7–46
01
06
07
04 04
03
05
03
03
7–47
03
03
Figure 7.35 Insert Location
07
03
05
INSERT PART NUMBERS 34-06231-## WHERE THE ## IS AS INDICATED
T-318
7.30 Communications Interface Module Installation
Figure 7.36 Communications Interface Installation
Communications
CB1 Interface Module
Units with communication interface module provision have the required wiring installed. The provision wiring kit
(part number 76-00685-00), includes three pre-addressed wires installed between the circuit breaker and commu-
nication interface module locations. These wires are to be connected to the module and circuit breaker to allow the
module to communicate over the power system. To install the module, do the following:
! WARNING
The unit power plug must be disconnected to remove power from circuit breaker CB1
a. CB1 is connected to the power system, see wiring schematic. Ensure that the unit power is off AND that the
unit power plug is disconnected.
b. Open control box, see Figure 7.36 and remove low voltage shield. Open high voltage shield.
c. Remove the circuit breaker panel, with circuit breaker, from the control box.
d. Locate wires CB21/CIA3, CB22/CIA5 and CB23/CIA7 that have been tied back in the wire harness. Remove
the protective heat shrink from the ends of the wires.
e. Attach the three wires as addressed to the LOAD side of the circuit breaker.
f. Refit the circuit breaker panel.
g. Fit the new RMU into the unit.
h. Remove plugs CIA, CIB and CID from the wiring harness and attach to the module.
i. Replace the low voltage shield.
7.31 Power Factor Corrector Capacitors (PFC)

The power factor corrector capacitors are of the permanent-split capacitor type. There are a total of three capaci-
tors with discharge resistors enclosed in a single case.
a. When to check for a defective capacitor
The capacitors assist in correcting current draw by the compressor. If one or more of the capacitors is faulty, there
will be an imbalance in current. In addition, the power consumption of the unit will increase.
b. Removing the capacitor
! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before removing capacitor(s).
T-318 7–48
! WARNING
Before removing the capacitors the terminals must be checked for voltage with a multimeter.
The discharge resistors installed on the unit (capacitors) should bring the voltage to a safe
level in a minute. However, there may be a broken resistor that retains voltage for a longer
period, it is highly recommended to wait 15 minutes and to check for voltage.
If the capacitors require discharging, first, turn the unit power OFF and disconnect the unit power plug. Then, place
a 20,000 ohm, 2 watt resistor across the terminals of the capacitor for approximately 30 seconds.
• If container is empty - Open upper rear panel of the unit. The capacitors will be on the right and may be
serviced after checking discharge.
• If container is full - Remove the upper fresh air makeup vent.
c. Checking the capacitor
If the capacitor is suspected of malfunction, you may choose to simply replace it. Direct replacement requires a
capacitor of the same value. Two methods for checking capacitor function are:
1. Volt-ohmmeter set on RX 10,000 ohms:
Connect ohmmeter leads across the capacitor terminals and observe the meter needle. If the capacitor is good, the
needle will make a rapid swing toward zero resistance and then gradually swing back toward a very high resistance
reading. The reading should read about 330,000 ohms (for a good capacitor) due to the discharge resistors.
If the capacitor has failed open, the ohmmeter needle will not move when the meter probes touch the terminals. If
the capacitor is shorted, the needle will swing to zero resistance position and stay there.
2. Capacitor analyzer:
The function of the analyzer is to read the microfarad value of a capacitor and to detect insulation breakdown under
load conditions. The important advantages of an analyzer are its ability to locate capacitors that have failed to hold
their microfarad ratings, or those that are breaking down internally during operation. It is also useful in identifying
capacitors when their microfarad rating marks have become unreadable.
7–49 T-318
Table 7–6 Recommended Bolt Torque Values (Dry, Non-Lubricated for 18-8 Stainless Steel)
Bolt Diameter Threads in-lb ft-lb N-m
Free Spinning
#4 40 5.2 0.4 0.6
#6 32 9.6 0.8 1.1
#8 32 20 1.7 2.3
#10 24 23 1.9 2.6
1/4 20 75 6.3 8.5
5/16 18 132 11 14.9
3/8 16 240 20 27.1
7/16 14 372 31 42
1/2 13 516 43 58.3
9/16 12 684 57 77.3
5/8 11 1104 92 124.7
3/4 10 1488 124 168.1
Non Free Spinning (Locknuts etc.)
1/4 20 82.5 6.9 9.3
5/16 18 145.2 12.1 16.4
3/8 16 264 22.0 29.8
7/16 14 409.2 34.1 46.2
1/2 13 567.6 47.3 64.1
9/16 12 752.4 62.7 85
5/8 11 1214.4 101.2 137.2
3/4 10 1636.8 136.4 184.9
Table 7–7 Wear Limits For Compressors

Maximum Wear Before
Factory Maximum Factory Minimum
Part Name Repair
inches mm inches mm inches mm
MAIN BEARING
Main Bearing Diameter 1.6268 41.3207 .0020 0.0508
Main Bearing Journal Diameter 1.6233 41.2318 .0020 0.0508
PUMP END
Main Bearing Diameter 1.3760 34.9504 .0020 0.0508
Main Bearing Journal Diameter 1.3735 34.8869 .0020 0.0508
CONNECTING ROD 1.3768 34.9707 .0020 0.0508
Piston Pin Bearing 0.6878 17.4701 .0010 0.0254
CRANKPIN DIAMETER 1.3735 34.8869 .0025 0.0635
Throw 1.072 27.2288 1.070 27.1780
THRUST WASHER (Thickness) 0.154 3.9116 0.1520 03.8608 .0250 0.6350
CYLINDERS
Bore 2.0010 50.8254 .0020 0.0508
Piston (Diameter) 1.9860 50.4444 .0020 0.0508
Piston Pin (Diameter) 0.6873 17.4574 .0010 0.0254
Piston Ring Gap 0.013 00.3302 0.0050 00.1270 .0250 0.6350
Piston Ring Side Clearance 0.002 00.0508 0.0010 00.0254 .0020 0.0508
T-318 7–50
Table 7–8 Compressor Torque Values
Size Torque Range
Threads Per
Diameter Usage
Inch ft-lb N.m
(inches)
1/16 27 (pipe) 8 - 12 11 - 16 Pipe Plug - Crankshaft
1/8 20 (pipe) 6 - 10 8 - 13 Oil Return Check Valve − Crankcase
1/4 20 (pipe) 20 - 25 27 - 34 Pipe Plug − Gauge Connection
1/4 20 10 - 12 13 - 16 Connecting Rod cap screw
12 - 15 16 - 20 Baffle Plate - Crankcase
12 - 16 16 - 22 Side Shield
1/4 28
6 - 10 8 - 13 Oil Pump Drive Segment
12 − 16 16 − 22 Unloader Valve
Cover Plate − Plate End
16 - 20 2 - 27 Bearing Head
5/16 18 Terminal Block Cap Screws
Suction Valve
20 - 30 27 - 41
Discharge Valve
Pump End Bearing Head
3/8 16 40 - 50 55 - 70 Bottom Plate − Crankcase Compressor Foot
Cylinder Head
7/16 14 55 - 60 76 - 83 Motor End Cover − Crankcase
5/8 11 25 - 30 34 - 41 Crankshaft
5/8 18 60 - 75 83 - 103 Oil Bypass Plug − Crankcase
#10 32 4-6 5-8 Oil Pump Drive Segment
1-1/2 18 NEF 35 - 45 48 - 62 Oil Level Sight Glass
NEF − National Extra Fine
7–51 T-318
Table 7–9 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart
Note: Underline figures are inches of mercury vacuum
°F °C PSIG °C °F BAR
-40 -40.0 14.8 -40 -40.0 -0.49
-38 -38.9 13.9 -39 -38.2 -0.46
-36 -37.8 13.0 -38 -36.4 -0.43
-34 -36.7 12.0 -37 -34.6 -0.40
-32 -35.6 10.9 -36 -32.8 -0.37
-30 -34.4 9.8 -35 -31.0 -0.34
-28 -33.3 8.7 -34 -29.2 -0.30
-26 -32.2 7.5 -33 -27.4 -0.27
-24 -31.1 6.3 -32 -25.6 -0.23
-22 -30.0 5.0 -31 -23.8 -0.20
-20 -28.9 3.7 -30 -22.0 -0.16
-18 -27.8 2.3 -29 -20.2 -0.12
-16 -26.7 0.8 -28 -18.4 -0.07
-14 -25.6 0.3 -27 -16.6 -0.03
-12 -24.4 1.1 -26 -14.8 0.02
-10 -23.3 1.9 -25 -13.0 0.06
-8 -22.2 2.8 -24 -11.2 0.11
-6 -21.1 3.6 -23 -9.4 0.16
-4 -20.0 4.6 -22 -7.6 0.22
-2 -18.9 5.5 -21 -5.8 0.27
0 -17.8 6.5 -20 -4.0 0.33
2 -16.7 7.5 -19 -2.2 0.39
4 -15.6 8.5 -18 -0.4 0.45
6 -14.4 9.6 -17 1.4 0.51
8 -13.3 10.8 -16 3.2 0.57
10 -12.2 11.9 -15 5.0 0.64
12 -11.1 13.1 -14 6.8 0.71
14 -10.0 14.4 -13 8.6 0.78
16 -8.9 15.7 -12 10.4 0.85
18 -7.8 17.0 -11 12.2 0.93
20 -6.7 18.4 -10 14.0 1.01
22 -5.6 19.9 -9 15.8 1.09
24 -4.4 21.3 -8 17.6 1.17
26 -3.3 22.9 -7 19.4 1.25
28 -2.2 24.5 -6 21.2 1.34
30 -1.1 26.1 -5 23.0 1.43
32 0.0 27.8 -4 24.8 1.53
34 1.1 29.5 -3 26.6 1.62
36 2.2 31.3 -2 28.4 1.72
38 3.3 33.1 -1 30.2 1.82
40 4.4 35.0 0 32.0 1.93
42 5.6 37.0 1 33.8 2.04
T-318 7–52
44 6.7 39.0 2 35.6 2.15
46 7.8 41.1 3 37.4 2.26
48 8.9 43.2 4 39.2 2.38
50 10.0 45.4 5 41.0 2.50
52 11.1 47.7 6 42.8 2.62
54 12.2 50.0 7 44.6 2.75
56 13.3 52.4 8 46.4 2.88
58 14.4 54.9 9 48.2 3.01
60 15.6 57.4 10 50.0 3.15
62 16.7 60.0 11 51.8 3.29
64 17.8 62.7 12 53.6 3.43
66 18.9 65.4 13 55.4 3.58
68 20.0 68.2 14 57.2 3.73
70 21.1 71.1 15 59.0 3.88
72 22.2 74.1 16 60.8 4.04
74 23.3 77.1 17 62.6 4.21
76 24.4 80.2 18 64.4 4.37
78 25.6 83.4 19 66.2 4.54
80 26.7 86.7 20 68.0 4.72
82 27.8 90.0 21 69.8 4.90
84 28.9 93.5 22 71.6 5.08
86 30.0 97.0 23 73.4 5.27
88 31.1 100.6 24 75.2 5.46
90 32.2 104.3 25 77.0 5.65
92 33.3 108.1 26 78.8 5.85
94 34.4 112.0 27 80.6 6.06
96 35.6 115.9 28 82.4 6.27
98 36.7 120.0 29 84.2 6.48
100 37.8 124.2 30 86.0 6.70
102 38.9 128.4 31 87.8 6.93
104 40.0 132.7 32 89.6 7.15
106 41.1 137.2 33 91.4 7.39
108 42.2 141.7 34 93.2 7.63
110 43.3 146.4 35 95.0 7.87
112 44.4 151.1 36 96.8 8.12
114 45.6 156.0 37 98.6 8.37
116 46.7 160.9 38 100.4 8.63
118 47.8 166.0 39 102.2 8.90
120 48.9 171.2 40 104.0 9.17
122 50.0 176.5 41 105.8 9.44
124 51.1 181.8 42 107.6 9.72
126 52.2 187.4 43 109.4 10.01
7–53 T-318
128 53.3 193.0 44 111.2 10.30
130 54.4 198.7 45 113.0 10.60
132 55.6 204.6 46 114.8 10.90
134 56.7 210.6 47 116.6 11.21
136 57.8 216.7 48 118.4 11.53
138 58.9 222.9 49 120.2 11.85
140 60.0 229.2 50 122.0 12.18
142 61.1 235.7 51 123.8 12.51
144 62.2 242.3 52 125.6 12.85
146 63.3 249.0 53 127.4 13.20
148 64.4 255.9 54 129.2 13.56
150 65.6 262.9 55 131.0 13.92
56 132.8 14.28
57 134.6 14.66
58 136.4 15.04
59 138.2 15.42
60 140.0 15.82
61 141.8 16.22
62 143.6 16.63
63 145.4 17.04
64 147.2 17.47
65 149.0 17.90
T-318 7–54
Figure 7.37 R-134a Compressor Pressure and Motor Current Curves Vs. Ambient Temperature, Sheet 1
Note: Curves to be used as troubleshooting guide only for model series 69NT40 with
fresh air makeup vent closed, unit powered on 460VAC/60Hz and SMV 100% open.
(Bar) psig
(22.0) 320
(20.7) 300
(19.3) 280
(17.9) 260
35 F (1.7 C)
(16.6) 240 Box
(15.2) 220
(13.8) 200
(12.4) 180
(11.0) 160
(9.7) 140
(8.3) 120
(6.9) 100
(5.5) 80
60 70 80 90 100 110 120 ( F)
(15.6) (21.1) (26.7) (32.2) (37.8) (43.3) (48.9) ( C)
Ambient Air Temperature
(Bar) psig
(22.0) 320
(20.7) 300
(19.3) 280
(17.9) 260
(16.6) 240
(15.2) 220
(13.8) 200
(12.4) 180
(11.0) 160
(9.7) 140 0 F (-17.8 C)
(8.3) 120 Box
(6.9) 100
(5.5) 80
60 70 80 90 100 110 120 ( F)
(15.6) (21.1) (26.7) (32.2) (37.8) (43.3) (48.9) ( C)
Compressor Discharge Pressure Versus Ambient Air Temperature at Stable Box Temperature
7–55 T-318
Figure 7.38 R-134a Compressor Pressure and Motor Current Curves Vs. Ambient Temperature, Sheet 2
(Bar) psig
(.97) 14
(.83) 12
(.69) 10
(.55) 8
35 F (1.7 C) Box
(.41) 6
(.28) 4
(.14) 2
(0) 0
0 F (-17.8 C) Box
(-.14) ï2
(-.28) ï4
(-.41) ï6
60 70 80 90 100 110 120 ( F)
(15.6) (21.1) (26.7) (32.2) (37.8) (43.3) (48.9) ( C)
Compressor Suction Pressure Versus Ambient Air Temperature at Stable Box Temperature
17
16
35 F (1.7 C) Box
15
14
13
12
11
0 F (-17.8 C) Box
10
8
60 70 80 90 100 110 120 ( F)
(15.6) (21.1) (26.7) (32.2) (37.8) (43.3) (48.9) ( C)
Compressor-Motor Current Versus Ambient Air Temperature At Stable Box Temperature
T-318 7–56
SECTION 8
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS
8.1 Introduction
This section contains the Electrical Schematics and Wiring Diagrams. The diagrams are presented as follows:
Figure 8.1 provides the legend for use with diagrams of 3-Phase Evaporator Fan units.
Figure 8.2 provides the schematic diagram for units with 3-Phase Evaporator Fan.
Figure 8.3 provides the legend for use with diagrams of Single Phase Evaporator Fan units.
Figure 8.4 provides the schematic diagram for units with normal evaporator fan operation capability.
Figure 8.5 provides the schematic diagram for units with single evaporator fan operation capability.
Figure 8.6 supplements the other schematic diagrams, provides schematics for Upper and Lower VPS & Transfresh.
Figure 8.7 supplements the other schematic diagrams and provides schematics Emergency Bypass.
Figure 8.8 provides the Schematic and Wiring Diagrams for the Electronic Partlow Recorder
Figure 8.9& Figure 8.10 provides the wiring diagram for units with 3-Phase Evaporator Motors
Figure 8.11& Figure 8.12 provides the wiring diagram for units with normal evaporator fan operation capability.
Figure 8.13 & Figure 8.14 provides the wiring diagram for units equipped with single evaporator fan operation capability.
8–1 T-318
Figure 8.1 LEGEND – Units with 3-Phase Evaporator Motors
LEGEND
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
AMBS AMBIENT SENSOR (Dï22) IC INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR (OPTION) (Tï23)
C CONTROLLER (Cï20) IP INTERNAL PROTECTOR (Eï10, Eï13, Gï13, Hï12)
CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER ï 460 VOLT (Jï1) IRL INïRANGE LIGHT (OPTION) (Mï16)
CB2 OPTIONAL CIRCUIT BREAKER 230V (DVM OPTION) PA CONTACTOR (Lï8, Mï8, Pï6)
TERMINAL BLOCK WHEN CB2 NOT PRESENT (Dï1) PB CONTACTOR (Lï8, Mï8, Pï7)
CF CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (Mï12, Pï9) PR PROBE RECEPTACLE
CI COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE (OPTION) (USDA OPTION) (Fï22, Mï23, Nï23, Pï23)
(Aï4) PTC1 PTC FOR VENT POSITION SENSOR (UPPER) (P19)
CH COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR (Lï10, Pï1) RM REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE (OPTION)
CïL COOL LIGHT (OPTION) (Lï14) (Lï13, Mï13, Lï16, Mï16)
CM CONDENSER FAN MOTOR (Hï10, Tï9) RRS RETURN RECORDER SENSOR (OPTION) (Cï22)
CP COMPRESSOR MOTOR (Eï10, Tï2) RTS RETURN TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Cï22)
CPDS COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE SENSOR (TEMP) (Bï22) SMV STEPPER MOTOR SUCTION MODULATION
CPSS COMPRESSOR SUCTION SENSOR (TEMP) VALVE (Tï18)
(OPTION), B22 SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
CPT CONDENSER PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Hï23) (OPTION) (Jï19)
CR CHART RECORDER (OPTION) (Aï17) SRS SUPPLY RECORDER SENSOR (Kï19)
CS CURRENT SENSOR (Mï2) ST START ï STOP SWITCH (Kï5)
DHBL DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM LEFT (Rï4) STS SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Aï22)
DHBR DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM RIGHT (Tï4) TC CONTROLLER RELAYïCOOLING (Kï10)
DHML DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE LEFT (Rï4) TCP CONTROLLER RELAY ï COMPRESSOR PHASE
DHMR DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE RIGHT (Tï3) SEQUENCING (Kï9)
DHTL DEFROST HEATER ï TOP LEFT (Rï3) TCC TRANSFRESH COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTOR
DHTR DEFROST HEATER ï TOP RIGHT (Tï4) (OPTION) (Dï6)
DL DEFROST LIGHT (OPTION) (Mï8) TE CONTROLLER RELAY ï HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER FANS (Kï12)
(OPTION) (Lï23) TH CONTROLLER RELAY ï HEATING (Kï14)
DTS DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Cï22) TI INRANGE RELAY (Kï15)
DVM DUAL VOLTAGE MODULE (OPTION) (Dï3) TF DEFROST RELAY (Kï8)
DVR DUAL VOLTAGE RECEPTACLE (OPTION) (Dï3) TL CONTROLLER RELAY ï COOL LIGHT (Kï13)
EF EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR TN CONTROLLER RELAY ï CONDENSER FAN (Kï10)
HIGH SPEED (Mï12, Lï11, Pï12) TP TEST POINT (Gï11, Jï10, Jï11, Jï12, Jï15, Mï17)
EM EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (Dï11, Fï11, Tï12, Tï15) TR TRANSFORMER (Mï3)
ES EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR TRANS TRANSFORMER AUTO 230/460 (OPTION) (Dï3)
LOW SPEED (Mï13, Pï11) TRC TRANSFRESH REAR CONNECTOR (OPTION) (Eï7)
F FUSE (Cï7, Dï7, Eï20, Fï20, Gï16, Hï6) TV CONTROLLER RELAY ï LOW SPEED EVAPORATOR
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS FANS (Kï14)
HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (Hï10) VPS VENT POSITION SENSOR (UPPER) (OPTION) (Nï18)
HR HEATER CONTACTOR (Mï15, Pï3) WP WATER PRESSURE SWITCH (OPTION) (Eï11)
HS HUMIDITY SENSOR (Gï23) WCR WETTING CURRENT RESISTOR (OPTION (Hï11)
HTT HEAT TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (Hï15)
T-318 8–2
Figure 8.2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - Units with 3-Phase Evaporator Motors
Based on Drawing 62−66058
8–3 T-318
Figure 8.3 LEGEND - Units with Single Phase Evaporator Motors
LEGEND
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION (Normal Schematic Location) SYMBOL DESCRIPTION (Normal Schematic Location)
(Single Evap. Fan Schematic Location) (Single Evap. Fan Schematic Location)
AMBS AMBIENT SENSOR (Dï19) [Dï23] HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (Jï7) [Hï8]
BM BYPASS MODULE (Figure 7-7) HR HEATER CONTACTOR (Mï13, Pï3) [Mï14, Nï6]
CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER ï 460 VOLT (Jï1) [Jï1] HS HUMIDITY SENSOR (Gï19) [Gï23]
CB2 CIRCUIT BREAKER ï AUTO TRANSFORMER (Dï1) HTT HEAT TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (Hï12) [Gï14]
[Cï1] IC INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR [FRONT/REAR]
CCH CRANKCASE HEATER (Tï4) [Tï4] (Tï19, Tï20) [Tï23, Tï24]
CF CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (Mï9, Pï8) [Mï9, Pï8] IP INTERNAL PROTECTOR (Eï8, Eï10, Hï9, H10)
CFS CONDENSER FAN SWITCH (Eï9) [Fï10] [Eï8, Gï8, Mï11, Mï13]
CH COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR (Mï7, Pï1, P3) IRL IN RANGE LIGHT (Mï13) [Lï15]
[Mï8, Nï1, Nï3] MDS MANUAL DEFROST SWITCH (Hï13) [Fï16]
CI COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE (Aï3) [Aï3] PE PRIMARY EARTH (Jï3) [Jï2]
CL COOL LIGHT (Mï11) [Gï13] PFC PFC POWER FACTOR CORRECTOR CAPACITOR
CM CONDENSER FAN MOTOR (Tï8) [Tï8] (Rï3) [Rï3]
CP COMPRESSOR MOTOR (Tï2) [Tï1] PR PROBE RECEPTACLE [USDA]
(Fï18, Mï19, Nï19, Pï19) [Eï23, Lï24, Mï24, Nï24]
CPT CONDENSER PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Hï19) [Hï23]
RM REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE
CPDS COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE SENSOR (Bï18) [Bï23] (Mï11, Mï12, Mï13) [Gï13, Lï15, Lï16]
CPSS COMPRESSOR SUCTION SENSOR (Eï18)[Dï23] RRS RETURN RECORDER SENSOR (Cï18) [Cï23]
CR CHART RECORDER [TEMPERATURE RECORDER] RTS RETURN TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Cï18) [Cï23]
(Figure 7-8)
S1 EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR #1 [LOW]
CS CURRENT SENSOR (Mï2) [Mï2] (Figure 7-5)
DHBL DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM LEFT (Rï7)[Rï7] S2 EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR #2 [LOW]
DHBR DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM RIGHT (Tï6) [Tï6] (Figure 7-5)
DHML DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE LEFT (Rï6) [Rï6] SMV SUCTION MODULATING VALVE (Rï14) [Rï17]
DHMR DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE RIGHT (Tï6) [Tï6] SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Jï19) [Jï23]
DHTL DEFROST HEATER ï TOP LEFT (Rï6) [Rï6] SRS SUPPLY RECORDER SENSOR (Lï19) [Lï23]
DHTR DEFROST HEATER ï TOP RIGHT (Tï7) [Rï7] ST START ï STOP SWITCH (Lï5) [Jï4]
DL DEFROST LIGHT (Mï12) [Lï15] STS SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Cï18) [Bï23]
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Kï19) [Kï23] TBU TRANSFORMER BRIDGING UNIT
DTS DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Dï18)[Dï23] TC CONTROLLER RELAY ï COOLING (Kï8) [Jï8]
DVM DUAL VOLTAGE MODULE (Eï1) [Dï1] TCC TransFRESH COMMUNICATIONS
CONNECTOR (Figure 7-6)
DVR DUAL VOLTAGE RECEPTACLE (Fï2) [Eï2]
TE CONTROLLER RELAY ï HIGH SPEED EVAP. FANS
E1 EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR #1 [HIGH] (Kï10) [Jï10]
(Pï8, Hï11, Jï11) [Pï8, Hï11, Jï11]
TF CONTROLLER RELAY ï DEFROST (Fï12) [Fï15]
E2 EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR #2 [HIGH]
(Jï11, Kï11, Pï10) [Jï11, Kï11, Pï10] TFC TransFRESH CONTROLLER (Figure 7-6)
EB EMERGENCY BYPASS SWITCH (Figure 7-8) TH CONTROLLER RELAY ï HEATING (Kï12) [Jï12]
EF EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR [HIGH] TI CONTROLLER RELAY ï IN RANGE (Gï13) [Gï15]
(Mï10, Pï10, P12) [Mï10, Pï10, P12] TN CONTROLLER RELAY ï CONDENSER FAN (Kï9) [Jï9]
EM EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (Tï10, Tï12) [Tï10, Tï12] TP TEST POINT (Fï9,Jï7, Jï9, Jï10, Jï12, Nï14)
ES EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR [LOW] [Gï10, Eï11, Jï8, Jï14, Kï8, Mï17]
(Mï11, Rï10, Rï11) [Mï11, Rï10, Rï11] TR TRANSFORMER (Mï3) [Lï2]
F FUSE (Dï7, Rï4) [Cï6, Rï4] TRANS AUTO TRANSFORMER 230/460 (Dï3) [Cï3]
FCR FUSE ï CHART RECORDER (Figure 7-8) TRC TransFRESH REAR CONNECTOR (Figure 7-6)
FED FUSE ï EMERGENCY DEFROST (Eï5) TV CONTROLLER RELAY ï LOW SPEED EVAP. FANS
FH FUSE ï HUMIDITY (Figure 7-6) (Kï11) [Jï11]
FT FUSE ï TransFRESH (Figure 7-6) WCR WETTING CURRENT RELAY (Hï9) [Jï10]
HM HOUR METER (Hï6) WP WATER PRESSURE SWITCH (Dï9) [Eï10]
T-318 8–4
Figure 8.4 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - Units with Normal Evaporator Fan Capability
FCCH
FCCH
6 Heater
8–5 T-318
Figure 8.5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - Units with Single Evaporator Fan Capability
FCCH
FCCH
T-318 8–6
Figure 8.6 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - TransFRESH and Vent Position Sensors (VPS)
ST TR
SEE FIGURE SEE FIGURE
7−2 or 7 −3 7−2 or 7 −3
TO KB7
TransFRESH Controller
Lower Air Exchange VPS
Upper Air Exchange VPS
8–7 T-318
Figure 8.7 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - Emergency Bypass
To ST10
To TRX2
To QC1
To QC1
To MC6
To QC1
CONTROLLER
T-318 8–8
Figure 8.8 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM, WIRING DIAGRAM - Electronic Partlow Recorder
NOTE: STANDARD CONTROLLER JUMPERS: MA3 TO MA7 AND MA9 TO MA11

(SEE Figure 8.4 ) ARE REMOVED IN THIS APPLICATION
CR5
CR4
CR3
CR6
CR8
CR2
NOTE: STANDARD CONTROLLER JUMPERS: MA3 TO MA7 AND MA9 TO MA11

(SEE Figure 8.4) ARE REMOVED IN THIS APPLICATION
8–9 T-318
Figure 8.9 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM - Units with 3-Phase Evaporator Motors (Sheet 1 of 2)
Based on Drawing 62 −66058
T-318 8–10
Figure 8.10 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM - Units with 3-Phase Evaporator Motors (Sheet 2 of 2)
Based on Drawing 62 −66058
8–11 T-318
Figure 8.11 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM - Units with Normal Evaporator Fan Capability (Sheet 1 of 2)
UPPER VPS
KB7
[DF11]
TRC2 TRC1
CFL1
CFL3
31
11
12
32
FCCH
FCCH
[CFS −2]
CH31
CH11
WIRES TO TR X2:
DF −(TFC), P −(TFC),
BMA2,CIB1, GRD,
CHA2, RMA, KA12,
EFA2, HRA2 & CR8
ECG1
[EB8]
FCCH
FCCH
LOWER VPS
(ICF MAY BE IN
CONTROL BOX)
T-318 8–12
Figure 8.12 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM Units with Normal Evaporator Fan Capability (Sheet 2 of 2)
[UVPS1] [UVPS2]
[HPRB]
KB7
NOTE: RM MAY
KA1
BE OUTSIDE
BOX
SMVD
[BM2B]
SMVC
[BM1B]
SMVB
[BM2A]
SMVA
[BM1A] RMB
CFS
UVPS3
KA6
TFC1
[RMC] CFA1
RMD
KB7
NOTE: WHENEB, ED, BM OR CFS IS/ARE INSTALLED, WIRE DESTINATIONS CHANGE FROM THE STANDARD.
ADDRESSES FOR THE CHANGED DESTINATIONS ARE SHOWN IN BRACKETS “[XXX]”.
FOR UNITS WITHOUT ELECTRONIC CR ONLY, FOR CR WIRING, SEE Figure 8.8
8–13 T-318
Figure 8.13 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM - Units with Single Evaporator Fan Capability (Sheet 1 of 2)
UPPER VPS
KB7
[DF11]
TRC2 TRC1
CFL1
CFL3
31
11
12
32
FCCH
FCCH
CH31
CH11
WIRES TO TR X2:
DF −(TFC),
P −(TFC),
BMA2,CIB1,
GRD, CHA2,
RMA, KA12,
EFA2, HRA2
& CR8
ECG1
[EB8]
FCCH
FCCH
(ICF MAY BE IN
CONTROL BOX)
LOWER VPS
T-318 8–14
Figure 8.14 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM - Units with Single Evaporator Fan Capability (Sheet 2 of 2)
[UVPS1]
[UVPS2]
[HPRB]
KB7
NOTE: RM MAY
KA1
BE OUTSIDE
BOX
SMVD
[BM2B]
SMVC
[BM1B]
SMVB
[BM2A]
SMVA
[BM1A]
RMB
CFS
KA6
CFA1
TFC1
[RMC]
RMD
KB7
8–15 T-318
INDEX
Numerics Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace 7–16

Condenser Grille 2–3
230 Volt Cable 2–3
Condenser Pressure Control 4–14
460 Volt Cable 2–3 Configuration Identification 2–1
Configuration Software (CnF Variables) 4–4
A Connect Power 5–1
Abnormal Noise or Vibrations 6–4 Connect Remote Monitoring Receptacle 5–7
Abnormal Pressures (Cooling) 6–3 CONNECT WATER-COOLED CONDENSER 5–6
Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge) 7–6 Connection to 190/230VAC Power 5–1
Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge) 7–7 Connection To 380/460 VAC Power 5–1
Adjust Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5–2 Control Box 2–1
Adjusting the Partlow Recorder Stylus 7–42 Control Box Repairs - Hinge Inserts 7–45
Air-Cooled Condenser Section 3–4 Control Box Repairs - Inserts 7–44
Alarm Configuration (dCF07 − dCF10) 4–20 Control Box Repairs -Chips and Holes 7–44
Arctic Mode 2–4, 4–15, 5–12 Control Box Repairs Introduction 7–43
Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–23 Control Box Section 3–6
Automatic Defrost 4–12 Control ox Repairs - Cracks 7–44
Autotransformer 2–2, 7–30 Controller 2–3, 4–3, 7–30
Autotransformer Malfunction 6–5 Controller Alarm Indications 4–35
Controller Alarms 4–15
B Controller Configuration Variables 4–24
Controller Function Codes 4–25
Back Panels 2–3 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes 4–41
Battery 2–2 Controller Programming Procedure 7–31
Battery Replacement 7–33 Controller Software 4–4
Controller Troubleshooting 7–30
C Crankcase 7–8
Cable Restraint 2–3 Crankcase Heater 5–12
Changing the Partlow Recorder Chart 7–41
Check Controller Function Codes 5–8 D
Checking eAutoFresh Drive System 7–38 DataCORDER 4–16
Checking High Pressure Switch 7–15 DataCORDER Alarms 4–23
Checking Superheat 7–20 DataCORDER Communications 4–21
Checking the Controller (SMV) 7–28 DataCORDER Logging Interval (dCF03) 4–18
Checking the Fan Motor Capacitor 7–25 DataCORDER Power-Up 4–20
Checking the Refrigerant Charge 7–6 DataCORDER Sensor Configuration (dCF02) 4–18
Checking the Stepper Valve (SMV) 7–28 DataCORDER Software 4–17
Communications Interface Module 2–2, 3–6 Defrost 4–11
Communications Interface Module Installation 7–46, 7– Defrost Interval 4–13
48
Defrost Related Settings 4–14
Complete Inspection 5–8
Dehumidification 2–2
Composite Control Box Repairs 7–43
Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–23
Compressor 2–1, 7–7
Display Module 2–3, 4–2
Compressor Disassembly 7–9
DPRV Check Procedure 7–29
Compressor Oil Level 7–14
Compressor Reassembly 7–12
E
Compressor Reassembly - Preparation 7–13
Compressor Section 3–3 eAutoFresh 2–4
Condenser Coil 2–1, 7–16 eAutoFresh Modes of Operation 5–5
Condenser Coil Removal 7–16 eAutoFresh Not Operating 6–5
Condenser Fan and Fan Motor 7–16 eAutoFresh Operation 5–4
Index–1 T-318
eAutoFresh Pre−Trip Inspection 5–5 I
eAutoFresh Service 7–37
Inspection (Before Loading) 5–1
eAutoFresh Start-Up Procedure 5–5
Interrogator 2–2
Electric Wiring Schematic and Diagrams - Introduction
8–1 Introduction 2–1
Electrical Data 3–8 ISO Trip Header 4–23
Electronic PARTLOW Temperature Recorder 7–41
Emergency Bypass 2–4 K
Emergency Bypass Operation 5–11 Keypad 4–2
Emergency Bypass Operation (option) 5–10
Emergency Defrost Operation 5–11 L
Evacuation and Dehydration 7–4
Complete System 7–5 Labels 2–3
General 7–4 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up) 2–3
Partial System 7–6 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5–3
Preparation 7–4
Evaporator 2–1 M
Evaporator Coil & Heater Assembly 7–22
Maintenance of Painted Surfaces 7–43
Evaporator Coil Replacement 7–22
Maintenance Precautions 1–1
Evaporator Fan and Motor Assembly 7–23
Manifold Gauge Set 7–1
Evaporator Fan Motor Capacitor 7–24
Microprocessor Malfunction 6–4
Evaporator Fan Operation 2–1, 4–14
Modes of Operation 4–5
Evaporator Heater Replacement 7–22
Evaporator Section 3–2
Evaporator Section Cleaning 7–25
N
No Evaporator Air Flow or Restricted Air Flow 6–4
F
Failure Action 4–14
O
Feature Descriptions 2–1 Operating Precautions 1–1
Filter-Drier 7–19 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) 4–5
First Aid 1–1 Option Descriptions 2–2
Fresh Air Makeup Vent 3–1
Frozen “Heat” Mode 4–10 P
Frozen Economy Mode 4–10
Perishable Economy 4–7
Frozen Idle Mode 4–10
Perishable Heating 4–6
Frozen Mode - Temperature Control 4–9
Perishable Idle, Air Circulation 4–6
Frozen Mode Cooling − Sequence of Operation 4–11
Perishable Mode Cooling − Sequence of Operation 4–8
Frozen Steady State 4–9
Perishable Mode Dehumidification 4–6
Perishable Mode Heating − Sequence of Operation 4–8
G
Perishable Mode Temperature Control 4–5
General Description 3–1 Perishable Pulldown 4–5
General Safety Notices 1–1 Perishable Steady State 4–5
general safety notices 1–1 Perishable, Dehumidification − Bulb Mode 4–7
Generator Protection 4–14 Physical Inspection 5–8
Gutters 2–2 Plate Set 2–2
Power Correction 2–4
H Power Factor Corrector Capacitors (PFC) 7–48
Pressure Readout 2–1
Handles 2–2
Pre-trip Data Recording 4–21
Handling Controller 7–30
Pre-Trip Diagnostics 4–16, 5–8
High Pressure Switch 7–15
Probe Diagnostics 5–10
Protection Modes of Operation 4–14
T-318 Index–2
Pump the Unit Down 7–4 U
Unit Introduction 2–1
Q
Unit Operates Long or Continuously Long in Cooling 6–1
Quest − CCPC 2–2, 4–15 Unit Runs But Has Insufficient Cooling 6–2
Unit Will Not Defrost Properly 6–3
R Unit Will Not Heat or Has Insufficient Heating 6–2
Unit Will Not Start or Starts Then Stops 6–1
Refrigerant Charge 7–6
Unit Will Not Terminate Heating 6–2
Refrigerant Leak Checking 7–4
Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up) 2–3
Refrigeration Circuit 3–10
Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5–2
Refrigeration System Data 3–7
USDA 2–2
Refrigeration Unit − Front Section 3–1
USDA Cold Treatment 4–22
Remote Monitoring 2–2
USDA Cold Treatment Procedure 4–22
Removal and Replacement of Compressor 7–7
Removing and Installing the Controller 7–32
Removing the Fan Motor Capacitor 7–25 V
Replacing High Pressure Switch 7–16 Vent Position Sensor 5–4
Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–23 Vent Position Sensor (VPS) 7–36
Replacing the Partlow Recorder 7–41
Rezeroing the Partlow Recording Thermometer 7–43 W
Water Cooling 2–3
S
Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning 7–17
Safety and Protective Devices 3–9 Water-Cooled Condenser Section 3–5
Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) 4–20 Water-Cooled Condenser with Condenser Fan Switch 5–
Section Layout 7–1 7
Sensor Checkout Procedure 7–34 Water-Cooled Condenser with Water Pressure Switch
Sensor Re-Installation 7–35 5–6
Sensor Replacement 7–34 When To Check For A Defective Fan Motor Capacitor 7–
Service Valves 7–2 24
Servicing the eAutoFresh Air Filter 7–37
Servicing the eAutoFresh Drive System 7–39
SMV Emergency Repair Procedure 7–29
SMV Pre-check Procedure 7–26
SMV- Suction Modulation Valve 7–26
SMV Valve Override Controls 7–27
Specific Hazard Statements 1–1
Start Temperature Recorder 5–8
Starting and Stopping Instructions 5–7
Starting the Unit 5–7
Start-Up Inspection 5–7
Stopping the Unit 5–7
T
Temperature Control Microprocessor System 4–1
Temperature Readout 2–1
Temperature Recorder 2–2
Temperature Sensor Service 7–33
Thermistor Format (dCF04) 4–18
Thermometer Port 2–3
Thermostatic Expansion Valve 7–20
Thermostatic Expansion Valve Malfunction 6–5
TXV Replacement 7–21
Index–3 T-318
Carrier Transicold Division,
Carrier Corporation
P.O. Box 4805
Syracuse, NY 13221 USA
https://www.carrier.com/container-refrigeration

Carrier 511 69NT40-541. From 300 To 499.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Carrier 511 69NT40-541. From 300 To 499.

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Carrier 511 69NT40-541. From 300 To 499.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Container Refrigeration

OPERATIONS AND SERVICE

© Carrier Corporation, 2021 Printed in U. S. A. April 2021

SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit − Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

Table 3–1 Safety and Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9

1.1 General Safety Notices

1.2 First Aid

1.3 Operating Precautions

1.4 Maintenance Precautions

1.5 Specific Warning and Caution Statements

2.2 Configuration Identification

2.3 Feature Descriptions

2.4 Option Descriptions

Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section − Units with Center Access Panel

1. Evaporator Fan Motor #1 9. Heat Exchanger

1. Autotransformer 12. Suction Temperature Sensor

1. Grille and Venturi Assembly 9. Sight Glass

Figure 3.5 Water-Cooled Condenser Section

1. Sight Glass 7. Liquid Line Service Valve

1. Compressor Contactor 13. Condenser Fan Switch

c. Condenser Horsepower 0.43 hp 0.75 hp

3.4 Safety and Protective Devices

Circuit with Receiver

4.1 Temperature Control Microprocessor System

TEMPERATURE CONTROL SOFTWARE

CONFIGURATION OPERATIONAL ALARMS Pre-trip

4.1.2 Display Module

Figure 4.3 Display Module

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

4.2 Controller Software

4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables)

1. Mounting Screw 5. Fuses

4.3 Modes of Operation

4.3.1 Perishable Mode Temperature Control

4.3.2 Perishable Pulldown

4.3.3 Perishable Steady State

4.3.5 Perishable Heating

Figure 4.5 Controller Operation − Perishable Mode

Perishable Mode Pull Down

4.3.6 Perishable Mode Dehumidification

NOTE: HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR FAN SHOWN. FOR LOW SPEED

4.3.10 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation

Figure 4.7 Perishable Mode Heating

4.3.11 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control

4.3.12 Frozen Steady State

4.3.13 Frozen Idle Mode

4.3.16 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation

Figure 4.9 Frozen Mode

4.3.19 Defrost Initiation

Figure 4.10 Defrost

4.3.20 Defrost Interval

4.4 Protection Modes of Operation

4.4.2 Failure Action

4.4.3 Generator Protection

4.4.4 Condenser Pressure Control

4.5 Quest − CCPC

4.6 Controller Alarms